Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Hardware Description
Issue
10
Date
2013-05-27
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Product Version
DBS3900
V100R007C00
DBS3900 GSM
V100R014C00
DBS3900 WCDMA
V200R014C00
DBS3900 LTE
V100R005C00
V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
System engineers
Organization
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
ii
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the
cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of
various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900
cabinets.
5 DBS3900 Power System
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
7 DBS3900 Cables
This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various
scenarios.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
iii
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
Courier New
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
[]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
>
Keyboard Operations
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
iv
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Key 1, Key 2
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Action
Description
Click
Double-click
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.....................................................................1
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet........................................................................9
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply...............................................................................................10
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................38
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................47
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................48
vi
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Contents
3.3.5 USLP2.....................................................................................................................................................................151
3.4 WGRU........................................................................................................................................................................153
3.5 EMUA........................................................................................................................................................................156
7 DBS3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................339
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900...........................................................................................................................340
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................340
7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................375
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
vii
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Contents
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
viii
DBS3900
Hardware Description
10 (2013-05-27)
This is the tenth official release.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
l 3.1.6 UMPT
l 3.1.8 LMPT
l 3.1.9 WBBP
l 3.1.10 LBBP
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
09 (2013-02-20)
This is the ninth official release.
Compared with issue 08 (2012-12-30), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 08 (2012-12-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.6 UMPT
08 (2012-12-30)
This is the eighth official release.
Compared with issue 07 (2012-11-08), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 07 (2012-11-08), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
07 (2012-11-08)
This is the seventh official release.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:
l
DCDU-12B
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following changes:
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), the following infomation is deleted from this issue:
l
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D1)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D1)
06 (2012-09-15)
This is the sixth official release.
Compared with issue 05 (2012-08-05), this issue includes the following new information:
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
Monitoring cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
Compared with issue 05 (2012-08-05), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
05 (2012-08-05)
This is the fifth official release.
Compared with issue 04 (2012-06-29), this issue includes the following new information:
l
Compared with issue 04 (2012-06-29), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.14 UTRP
3.1.7 GTMU
04 (2012-06-29)
This is the fourth official release.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-20), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.15 USCU
03 (2012-06-20)
This is the third official release.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Compared with issue 02 (2012-04-25), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-04-25), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.9 WBBP
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.15 USCU
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900
Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C) Cabinet
02 (2012-04-25)
This is the second official release.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-03-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-03-20), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.5 WMPT
3.1.6 UMPT
3.1.7 GTMU
3.1.8 LMPT
3.1.9 WBBP
3.1.11 FAN
3.1.12 UPEU
3.1.14 UTRP
3.1.15 USCU
3.1.17 UCIU
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.16 UBRI
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
01 (2012-03-20)
This is the first official release.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.10 LBBP
Draft A (2012-02-10)
This is a draft.
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following new
information:
l
HEUA
3.2 RRU
3.1.6 UMPT
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in 5.1.6 Application
Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
Power distribution scheme in 5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
Monitoring scheme in 6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
Cabinet
Power cable connections in Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A
Monitoring signal cable connections in Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following
changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.9 WBBP
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.15 USCU
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, no information is deleted from this
issue.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.D)
BBU 0 is installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is
installed in an APM30H
(Ver.D) or TMC11H
(Ver.D), and RRUs are
installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
power to the BBU, and the
APM30H (Ver.D) supplies
power to RRUs.
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.A)
APM30
10
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Scenario Description
Remarks
TP48600A
BBU Installed in a
TP48600A Cabinet
OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are referred to as APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H
(Ver.C)are referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
cabinet are as follows:
l
A maximum of 6 RRU power cables and 12 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right, and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on the left. If
both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is
positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on
the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If space
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets in the reverse
way of the base station deployment scenario.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
11
DBS3900
Hardware Description
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the APM30H cabinet. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The
BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left side.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacit
y
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No
backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
The
number
of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200
Ts is the
same as
that of
APM30H
s in the
initial
configura
tion
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
The
number
of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200
Ts is two
times that
of
APM30H
s in the
initial
configura
tion
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
12
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
When the number of storage battery cabinets are the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 2-2.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
13
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of storage battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-3.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
14
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the main
APM30H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H, which is on
the right side.
Table 2-3 describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet
Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
The number
of
IBBS200Ds
or
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
15
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet
Configuration
IBBS200Ts
is the same as
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
The number
of
IBBS200Ds
or
IBBS200Ts
is two times
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
+4 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure
2-4.
Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
16
DBS3900
Hardware Description
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-5.
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-6.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
17
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
cabinet are as follows:
l
An APM30H supports only one TMC11H cabinet and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts.
A maximum of 12 RRU power cables and 24 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right side, and
auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
18
DBS3900
Hardware Description
the left side. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery
cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is
stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and
new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion.
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
19
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in the following figure.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
20
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
21
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment,
and carrier configurations.
Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power.
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
4U
12
RRUs
15 U
12
RRUs
22
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power
Supply
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
Cabinet Configuration
The number
of
IBBS200D
s or
IBBS200Ts
is the same
as the
number of
APM30Hs
in the initial
configurati
on.
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
4U
12
RRUs
15 U
12
RRUs
l The
number
of
IBBS20
0Ds or
IBBS20
0Ts is
twice
the
number
of
APM30
Hs in the
initial
configur
ation.
l The
number
of
IBBS70
0Ds or
IBBS70
0Ts is
the
same as
the
number
of
APM30
Hs
during
base
5U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
16 U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
4U
12
RRUs
23
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
station
deploy
ment.
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
Cabinet Configuration
15 U
12
RRUs
NOTE
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial site
construction, and the site is configured with more than six RRUs, the IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be
configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 92 Ah storage batteries to avoid overcurrent of a
single battery pack during the discharging.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The BBUs are installed as follows:
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial site construction, the BBUs are installed in
an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU
is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When a triple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the
position of BBU0 in the following figure.
When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment are shown in the
following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
24
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios
of new site deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
25
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
26
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
27
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and
carrier configurations.
Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Custome
r
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configur
ation
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power.
2U
12
RRUs
13 U
12
RRUs
2U
12
RRUs
The number of
IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts
is the same as
the number of
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
28
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Custome
r
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configur
ation
Cabinet Configuration
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration.
13 U
12
RRUs
l The
number of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200T
s is twice
the
number of
APM30Hs
in the
initial
configurati
on.
2U
12
RRUs
13 U
12
RRUs
l The
number of
IBBS700
Ds or
IBBS700T
s is the
same as
the
number of
APM30Hs
in the
initial
configurati
on.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
29
DBS3900
Hardware Description
A single APM can be installed together with only one TMC and a maximum of one
integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric
cooling unit.
A maximum of six power cables and twelve dual-wire fiber optic cables can be led out
from a single APM.
A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked below
a TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked below
the TMC.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If both
the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned
on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet
or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
way of the base station deployment scenario.
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the APM. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic APM, which is on the left.
Table 2-6 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet
Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+1
TMC
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 BBC/
IBBS
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 BBC/
IBBS+1 TMC
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs+1
TMC
0.5 h or 2 h
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
30
DBS3900
Hardware Description
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is not required
When 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is required, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-16.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
31
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when 0.5 h or 2 h
backup power is required
A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet side by
side.
In a single- or dual-mode base station, one BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the direct
current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) in the equipment compartment. Table 2-7 lists the
cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements for
backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
32
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
configured
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
The number
of
IBBS700Ds
or
IBBS700Ts
is the same
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for
customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-17.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
33
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage
battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-18.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
34
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under
the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under
BBU 0. Table 2-8 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
configured
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
35
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet Configuration
The number
of
IBBS700Ds
or
IBBS700Ts
is the same
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer
equipment are shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with backup power of 48 V
and 300 Ah
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
36
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of
IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration
An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-21.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
37
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 2-21 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
(Ver.C)
38
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Scenario Description
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.B)
TMC11H (Ver.D)
BBU Installed in a
TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet
Supplied with +24 V DC
Power
OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
39
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l
A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single
TMC11H.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If space
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the TMC11H cabinet.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
8U
12 RRUs
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
40
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed
in the main TMC11H cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H
cabinet, which is on the right.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
18 U
12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l
A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single
TMC11H.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If space
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
41
DBS3900
Hardware Description
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the TMC11H cabinet.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Table 2-12.
Table 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
8U
12 RRUs
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, and the BBUs are installed as follows:
l
In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a
TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is
installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the
BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input).
Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Table 2-13.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
42
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
6U
12 RRUs
17 U
12 RRUs
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Figure 2-26. In Figure 2-26, illustrations a and b show the site deployment scenario
and illustration c shows the capacity expansion scenario, respectively.
Figure 2-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single
TMC.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
43
DBS3900
Hardware Description
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
way of the base station deployment scenario.
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the TMC. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two TMCs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic TMC, which is on the left.
Table 2-14 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC (with
one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC (with
two DCDUs)
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
44
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
5U
6 RRUs
Figure 2-28 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied
with +24 V DC power.
Figure 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24 V DC
scenario
Table 2-16 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with
+24 V DC power.
Table 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
10 U
12 RRUs
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
45
DBS3900
Hardware Description
An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
(Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
46
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Scenario Description
Reference
IMB03
IFS06
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
47
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Scenario Description
Reference
19-inch rack
Wall
Indoor
IMB03
IFS06
48
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
49
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
50
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
51
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
52
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
53
DBS3900
Hardware Description
3.1 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.1.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)
(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used
during base station commissioning.
l
If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 ESN (1)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of
the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration
data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate
and maintain the base station.
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
55
DBS3900
Hardware Description
BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-1 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.
Table 3-1 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It must be
configured in
slot 6, with both
slots 5 and 6
occupied.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is referentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
56
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UCIU
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-2 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.
Table 3-2 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
or WMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
57
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
The slot
assignment
principles for
the WBBP
boards are as
follows:
l The WBBPd
or WBBPf is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence
over the
WBBPd in
slot
assignment.
l If five or
more
WBBPs are
required,
ensure that a
WBBP is
installed in
each of slots
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
58
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
2 and 3. At
least one of
the WBBPs
in slots 2 and
3 is WBBPd
or WBBPf.
l If both slots
2 and 3 are
occupied by
the WBBPa
or WBBPb
boards,
exchange
boards to
ensure that
the WBBPd
or WBBPf is
configured
in slot 3 or 2.
l If the
WBBPf4 is
installed in
the same
BBU as the
WBBPf1,
WBBPf2,
and
WBBPf3,
the WBBPf4
is
preferentiall
y installed in
slots 2 and 3.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
59
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6
A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
If several
UTRPs are
configured, the
priority of them
as following:
UTRPc,
UTRP6,
UTRP9,
UTRP2,
UTRP3/UTRP4
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
60
DBS3900
Hardware Description
BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-3 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.
Table 3-3 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single LMPT
or UMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
61
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
BBU3900 GU
Table 3-4 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
62
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-4 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
63
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
or 4.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
64
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
BBU3900 GL
Table 3-5 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
65
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-5 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
or 4.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
66
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
BBU3900 UL
Table 3-6 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Table 3-6 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6
It is configured
only in slot 6.
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5
A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
67
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5
A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
68
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
69
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
70
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 3
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
71
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-8 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE
mode.
Table 3-8 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.
FAN
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
72
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
73
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
The UMPT
must be
configured as
the main control
board in the
UCIU+UMPT
cascading
scenario.
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0 to slot 3
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, or
0.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
74
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-10 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the
UMTS mode.
Table 3-10 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
75
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
76
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6
A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
77
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
78
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0 to slot 3
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
79
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-12 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
80
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-12 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6
It is configured
only in slot 6.
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5
A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5
A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
81
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
3.1.5 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the
BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-13 lists the WMPT specifications.
Table 3-13 WMPT specifications
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
WMPT
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1
Four
channels
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
82
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
NOTE
For the combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 3-11 WMPT panel
Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions:
l
Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data
can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
Indicators
Table 3-14 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
83
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
The board is
functioning properly.
l Data or software
is being loaded to
the board.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board must be
replaced.
Steady off
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
84
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which
indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning
Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are
at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel
Table 3-15 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-15 Port status indicators
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
85
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Ports
Table 3-16 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-16 Ports on the WMPT panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
E1/T1 port
E1/T1 port
FE0
RJ45 connector
FE electrical port
FE1
FE optical port
GPS
SMA connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB connector
USB(3)
USB connector
RST
86
DBS3900
Hardware Description
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/
T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different
modes. Figure 3-13 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Figure 3-13 DIP switch settings of the WMPT
Table 3-17 and Table 3-18 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Table 3-17 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT
DIP
Switch
SW1
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DIP Status
Description
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
T1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.
87
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DIP
Switch
DIP Status
1
Description
2
Others
Unavailable
DIP Status
Description
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Others
Unavailable
3.1.6 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages
resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
NOTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1
Four
channels
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex
88
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
UMPTa2/
UMPTa6
LTE
IP over E1/
T1
Four
channels
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex
The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working
in LTE mode.
Table 3-20 Signaling specifications
Board
UMPTa2/UMPTa6
60
The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum number
of users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.
Table 3-21 Data radio bearer specifications
Board
UMPTa2/UMPTa6
10800
The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working in
LTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.
NOTE
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB or NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers and
RRC_connected users, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.
Panel
Figure 3-14, Figure 3-16, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17 show the panels of the UMPT boards.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
89
DBS3900
Hardware Description
NOTE
In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,
UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.
Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions:
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
90
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference
clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.
Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance
with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.
Ports
Table 3-22 describes the ports on the UMPT.
Table 3-22 Ports on the UMPT
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
FE/GE1
SFP female
connector
FE/GE0
RJ45 connector
USB(1)
USB connector
E1/T1
DB26 female
connector
GPS
SMA connector
CI
SFP female
connector
RST
NOTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
91
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicators
Table 3-23 describes the indicators on the UMPT.
Table 3-23 Indicators on the UMPT
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
The board is
functioning properly.
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off
An alarm is
generated, and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
92
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
l All cells
corresponding to
the subrack that
houses this board
are not activated.
l The S1 link is
faulty.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa2 and
UMPTa6 have this
status.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of
the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The
indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1
port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure
3-18.
Figure 3-18 Indicators for ports
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
93
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Color
Status
Definition
Green
Steady on
The connection is
normal.
Steady off
The connection is
abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted.
Steady on
The connection is
normal.
Steady off
The connection is
abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted.
Steady green
The interconnection
link is normal.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive
signals because of
one of the following
reasons:
CI
Orange
Green
Orange
Red or green
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The optical cable
is broken.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
94
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicator/
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Definition
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Steady off
R0, R1, R2
Red or green
Reserved
L01
Red or green
Steady off
Steady green
E1/T1 link 0 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 1 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.
E1/T1 link 1 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 0 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady red
95
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicator/
Silkscreen
L23
Color
Red or green
Status
Definition
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 0.
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 1.
Steady off
Steady green
E1/T1 link 2 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 3 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.
E1/T1 link 3 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 2 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady red
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 2.
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 3.
DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-19 shows the positions
of DIP switches on the UMPT.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
96
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:
l
SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-25 describes the DIP switch.
SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-26 describes the
DIP switch.
DIP Status
1
SW1
ON
ON
Reserved
Reserved
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Description
DIP Status
1
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
Description
3.1.7 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and
control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and
external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
97
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-27 lists the transmission
specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-27 Transmission specifications of the GTMU
Board
Supported
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
GTMU/
GTMUb
GSM
TDM over
E1/T1
Four
channels
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Table 3-28 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-28 TRX specifications of the GTMU
Board
Supported Mode
Transmission
Mode
Maximum Carrier
Number
GTMU
GSM
TDM
72
IP over FE or IP over
E1
36
TDM
126
IP over FE
60
IP over E1
48
GTMUb
GSM
Panel
Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Figure 3-20 GTMU panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
98
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions:
l
Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.
Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Indicators
Table 3-29 describes the indicators on the GTMU.
Table 3-29 Indicators on the GTMU
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
There is no fault.
ALM
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Red
99
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
ACT
Color
Green
Status
Description
Steady on
Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating
the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning
port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-30 describes the
indicators.
Table 3-30 Indicators for ports
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
LIU0 to LIU3
Green
Steady on
An E1/T1 remote
alarm is generated.
Steady off
The link is
functional.
Steady green
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
CPRI0 to CPRI5
Red or green
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
100
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
ETH
FE0
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Orange (ACT
indicator on the right
side)
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Orange (ACT
indicator on the right
side)
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)
101
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
Green (ACT
indicator on the right
side)
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Ports
Table 3-31 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-31 Ports on the GTMU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
SFP female
connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
FE0
RJ45 connector
FE1
DLC connector
TST(2)
USB connector
USB(3)
USB connector
E1/T1
DB26 female
connector
RST
102
DBS3900
Hardware Description
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-32 Specifications of the GTMU ports
Board
Number of CPRI
Ports
Topo Type
GTMU
1.25
Topologies of star,
chain, and ring
GTMUb
1.25/2.5
Topologies of star,
chain, and ring
DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l
S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-33 provides details on the DIP switch.
S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-34 provides
details on the DIP switch.
S3 is reserved.
S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-35 provides details on the DIP switch.
S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-36 provides details
on the DIP switch.
DIP Setting
1
S1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
Others
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Unavailable
103
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.
The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
DIP Setting
Description
S2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Others
DIP Setting
1
S4
ON
ON
ON
ON
Supporting E1 bypass
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not supporting E1
bypass
Description
Others
Unavailable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
1
S5
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not supporting E1
bypass
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass
of level-1 cascaded
base stations
Description
104
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass
of level-2 cascaded
base stations
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass
of level-3 cascaded
BTSs
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass
of level-4 cascaded
BTSs
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Supporting E1 bypass
of level-5 cascaded
BTSs
3.1.8 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-37 lists the specifications of the LMPT.
Table 3-37 Specifications of the LMPT
Board
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
LMPT
LTE
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
105
DBS3900
Hardware Description
LMPT
30
The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode supported by
the LMPT.
Table 3-39 Maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode
Board
LMPT
5400
The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LMPT is three times the maximum
number of RRC_connected users.
NOTE
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers and RRC_connected
users, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-22 shows the LMPT.
Figure 3-22 LMPT
Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions:
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
106
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-40 describes the indicators on the LMPT
panel and their status.
Table 3-40 Indicators on the LMPT panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
Steady off
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
107
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection
status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no
silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-41 describes the indicators.
Table 3-41 Indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Green (LINK)
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Steady on
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Orange (ACT)
ETH
Orange (ACT)
Green (LINK)
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
Green (LINK)
Orange (ACT)
Ports
Table 3-42 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
108
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Connector
Quantity
Description
SFP female
connector
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB connector
Test port
USB(3)
USB connector
Software loading
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
GPS
SMA connector
GPS port
RST
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used
simultaneously.
3.1.9 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
NOTE
Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-43.
NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
109
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Number of Cells
Supported
Number of UL CEs
Number of DL
CEs
WBBPa
128
256
WBBPb1
64
64
WBBPb2
128
128
WBBPb3
256
256
WBBPb4
384
384
WBBPd1
192
192
WBBPd2
384
384
WBBPd3
256
256
WBBPf1
192
256
WBBPf2
256
384
WBBPf3
384
512
WBBPf4
512
768
NOTE
For the combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, Figure 3-25, and
Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-23 Panel of the WBBPa
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
110
DBS3900
Hardware Description
NOTE
l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,
WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,
respectively.
l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and
WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
l
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1
+1 backup mode.
When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd
supports the IC of uplink data.
The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between
BBUs.
Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-44 describes the indicators on the
WBBP and their status.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
111
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-44 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
Steady off
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf
provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP
ports.
Table 3-45 describes the indicators.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
112
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
113
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-46 describes this indicator.
Table 3-46 QSFP port status indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over QSFP
ports.
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-47 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
114
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Connector
Description
CPRIx
Table 3-48 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Table 3-48 Ports on the WBBPd panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0, CPRI1,
CPRI2, CPRI3/
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,
CPRI5/EIH2
The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-49.
Table 3-49 Ports on the WBBPf panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRIx
HEI
QSFP connector
3.1.10 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
115
DBS3900
Hardware Description
LBBPc
30
LBBPd1/LBBPd2/LBBPd3
60
The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users supported by the LBBP.
Table 3-51 Maximum RRC_connected users
Board
Cell Bandwidth
Maximum RRC_Connected
Users
LBBPc
1.4 MHz
1008
3 MHz
1800
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
1800
15 MHz
20 MHz
1.4 MHz
504
3 MHz
1080
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
1.4 MHz
1008
3 MHz
2160
5 MHz
3600
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
LBBPd1/LBBPd2
LBBPd3
The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LBBP is three times the
maximum RRC_connected users.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
116
DBS3900
Hardware Description
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the following specifications, see section "Baseband
Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: the maximum number of data radio
bearers, maximum RRC_connected users per cell, maximum RRC_connected users supported by an entire
base station, and maximum uplink and downlink throughput per cell or user.
Maximum Throughout
LBBPc
LBBPd1
LBBPd2
LBBPd3
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-53 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios
Board
Number of
Cell
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPc
LBBPd1
LBBPd2
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
117
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Board
Number of
Cell
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPd3
6x10M 1T1R
6x10M 1T2R
6x10M 2T2R
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-54 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios
Board
Number of
Cell
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPc
LBBPd2
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
118
DBS3900
Hardware Description
l The "Antenna Configuration" column lists the maximum configurations supported by various types of
LBBP. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R, and
therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and 3x5
MHz 4T4R.
l Cells supported by a baseband board can use different antenna configurations as long as the maximum
antenna configuration supported by the baseband board is not exceeded. For example: An LBBPd2
supports 3x20 MHz 2T2R configuration. Among the three cells supported by the LBBPd2, one cell
uses 2T2R antenna configuration, and the other two cells can use either 2T2R or 1T1R antenna
configuration.
l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as
the total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, if
an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPc
can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10
MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RRUs:
RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd, RRU3229,
RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI convergence of the
LBBP must comply with the following principles:
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two
LBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multiple
LBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can
connect to RF units.
l The maximum throughput listed in the following table indicates the hardware capability of the LBBPc
and LBBPd used in the LTE TDD system. In an actual network, the peak throughput in the uplink and
downlink depends on the uplink-downlink subframe configuration.
Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-27 LBBPc panel
NOTE
The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, and LBBPd3 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, and LBBPd3 indicating their
board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
119
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions:
l
Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-55.
Table 3-55 Indicators on the LBBP panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
Steady off
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
120
DBS3900
Hardware Description
As listed in Table 3-56, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.
Table 3-56 SFP link status indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)
link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-57 describes the indicator.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
121
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l The data rates of
the QSFP ports do
not match each
other.
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-58 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.
Table 3-58 LBBP ports
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
Connected to the RF
modules for
transmitting service
data, clock signals,
and synchronization
information.
122
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Connector
Quantity
Description
HEI
QSFP connector
Reserved
3.1.11 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-29 and Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-29 FAN
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
123
DBS3900
Hardware Description
NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.
Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:
l
Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.
Dissipates heat.
Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status
of the fans. Table 3-60 describes the indicator.
Table 3-60 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
STATE
Red or green
The module is
working.
The module is
reporting alarms.
124
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
There is no power
supply.
3.1.12 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a
(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and
environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit
type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC
power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-31, Figure
3-32, Figure 3-33, and Figure 3-34 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and
UPEUd, respectively.
Figure 3-31 UPEUa panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
125
DBS3900
Hardware Description
NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,
respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.
The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.
Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l
Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating
voltage of the boards.
Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each
receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open
Collector (OC) signals.
126
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Output Power
Backup Mode
UPEUa
1+1 backup
UPEUc
1+1 backup
UPEUd
1+1 backup
NOTE
After the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc, the UPEU power consumption data monitored by the M2000
will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the data
collection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for collecting power consumption data.
Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the M2000 after the UPEUa is replaced by the
UPEUc does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.
Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-62
describes the indicator.
Table 3-62 Indicator on the UPEU panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
The board is
functional.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean
signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-35 shows the slots in the BBU.
Figure 3-35 Slots in the BBU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
127
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscree
n
Connecto
r
Quantity
Description
Slot 19
+24 V or
-48 V
3V3 or
7W2
connector
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector
MON0
RJ45
connector
MON1
RJ45
connector
+24 V or
-48 V
3V3 or
7W2
connector
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector
MON0
RJ45
connector
MON1
RJ45
connector
Slot 18
3.1.13 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals
and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Panel
Figure 3-36 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
128
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l
Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.
Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals
can only be dry contact or OC signals.
Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
board.
Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one
path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean
signals.
Table 3-64 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
Table 3-64 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Slot
Silkscre
en
Connect
or
Quanti
ty
Description
Slot 18
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector
MON0
RJ45
connector
MON1
RJ45
connector
3.1.14 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the
BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
129
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Specifications
Table 3-65 describes the specifications of the UTRP.
Table 3-65 Specifications of the UTRP
Board
Subboard/
Board
Type
Supporte
d Mode
Transmis
sion
Mode
Number
of ports
Port
Capacity
Full/
HalfDuplex
UTRP2
UEOC
UMTS
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex
UTRP3
UAEC
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRP4
UIEC
UMTS
IP over E1/
T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRPb4
Without a
sub-board
GSM
TDM over
E1/T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRP6
UUAS
UMTS
STM-1/
OC-3
One
channel
Fullduplex
UTRP9
UQEC
UMTS
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex
UTRPc
Without a
sub-board
GSM
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports
100 Mbit/s
and 1000
Mbit/s
Fullduplex
UMTS
LTE
Panel
Figure 3-37 shows the panel of the UTRP2.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
130
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
131
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions:
l
Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.
Indicators
Table 3-66 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.
Table 3-66 Indicators on the UTRP panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
132
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ALM
Red
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
Steady off
ACT
Green
The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator
on other boards, as listed in Table 3-67.
Table 3-67 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
Steady on
l Before the
configuration
takes effect, none
or both of the two
E1 ports in GSM
mode are
functional.
l The
configuration has
taken effect.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
133
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Before the
configuration takes
effect, only one E1
port in GSM mode is
functional.
Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating
the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-68.
Table 3-68 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
LINK
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.
ACT
Orange
There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table
3-69.
Table 3-69 Status of indicators on the UTRPc
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
R0
Red or green
Steady off
Steady green
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
Steady green
R1
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Red or green
134
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
R2
Red or green
Status
Description
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
Steady green
Steady red
Reserved
NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.
Ports
Table 3-70 describes the ports on the UTRP2.
Table 3-70 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
SFP female
connector
The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-71.
Table 3-71 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
E1/T1
E1/T1 port
DB26 female
connector
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
STM-1/OC-3
STM-1/OC-3
SFP female
connector
135
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-73 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3
RJ45 connector
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
SFP female
connector
FE/GE2 to FE/GE5
RJ45 connector
DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used to
set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance of
the E1 cable. Figure 3-43 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-44
shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4.
Figure 3-43 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
136
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 3-75, Table 3-76, and Table 3-77 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.
Table 3-75 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP
DIP
Switch
SW1
DIP Setting
Description
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Others
Unavailable
DIP Setting
1
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Description
Others
Unavailable
CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2
corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
137
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DIP Setting
Description
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
T1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.
Others
Unavailable
3.1.15 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).
Specifications
The USCU falls into five types, as shown in Table 3-78.
Table 3-78 Specifications of the USCU
Board
Supported Mode
USCUb11
LTE
N/A
USCUb14
GSM
UMTS
LTE
USCUb22
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Panel
There are five types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, USCUb14, USCUb22, and USCUb21,
as shown in Figure 3-45 and Figure 3-46. The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have the
same exterior. The USCUb22 and the USCUb21 have the same exterior.
Figure 3-45 USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
138
DBS3900
Hardware Description
NOTE
l The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have silkscreens USCUb11 , USCUb12 and USCUb14
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The USCUb22 and USCUb21 have silkscreens USCUb22 and USCUb21 indicating their board types
on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The USCU has the following functions:
l
The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused
equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.
The USCUb12 contains an RT satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.
The USCUb21 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a K161 satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.
Indicators
Table 3-79 and Table 3-80 describe the indicators on the USCU.
Table 3-79 Indicators on the USCU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
139
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
The board is
functioning properly.
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
Red
ACT
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Color
Status
Description
140
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Table 3-81 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 3-81 Ports on the USCU
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
GPS
SMA connector
RGPS port
PCB welded
wiring terminal
TOD0 port
RJ45 connector
TOD1 port
RJ45 connector
BITS port
SMA connector
M-1PPS port
SMA connector
3.1.16 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.
Panel
Figure 3-47 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Figure 3-47 UBRI panel
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
141
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Indicators
Table 3-82 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-82 Indicators on the UBRI panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are
above the SFP ports. Table 3-83 describes the indicators.
Table 3-83 CPRI port status indicators
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
142
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
Ports
Table 3-84 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-84 Ports on the UBRI panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
143
DBS3900
Hardware Description
CPRI Port
Quantity
Topology Type
UBRI
1.25/2.5
3.1.17 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards
control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
Panel
Figure 3-48 shows the UCIU panel.
Figure 3-48 UCIU panel
Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions:
l
Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU
to another.
Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.
Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for
interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-86 describes the
indicators on the UCIU panel.
Table 3-86 Indicators on the UCIU panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
144
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
Steady off
There is no fault.
Steady on
Steady off
M0 to M4
and S0
Red or green
Steady green
Steady red
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
145
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Table 3-87 describes UCIU ports.
Table 3-87 UCIU ports
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
M0 to M4
SFP female
connector
S0
SFP female
connector
GCK
DB15 connector
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
The RRU implements the following functions:
l
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the
communication between the BBU and the RRU.
The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received
signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)
conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)
conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.
3.3 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.3.1 SLPU
The SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high.
Figure 3-49 shows the SLPU.
Figure 3-49 SLPU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
146
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Optional or
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UELP
Optional
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 0, 1, or
3.
UFLP
Optional
Slot 3
If both the
UELP and
UFLP are
configured, the
UFLP is
installed in a slot
with a higher
priority than the
UELP.
When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoring
signal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated with
two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU.
Table 3-89 lists the slot assignment rules for the SLPU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
147
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Optional or
Mandatory
Quantity
Slot
Remarks
USLP2
Optional
3.3.3 UELP
Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths
of E1/T1 signals.
Panel
Figure 3-51 shows the panel of the UELP.
Figure 3-51 UELP panel
Ports
Table 3-90 lists the ports on the UELP.
Table 3-90 Ports on the UELP
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE
Connecting to a transmission
board of the base station
OUTSIDE
Connecting to an external
transmission device
DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.
The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-52 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
148
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DIP Status
1
S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
Other status
Not grounded
Grounded
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable
of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
3.3.4 UFLP
Each universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE
signals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for two
channels of FE/GE signals.
NOTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
149
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Panel
Figure 3-53 shows the UELP panel.
Figure 3-53 UELP panel
Port
Table 3-92 describes UFLP ports.
Table 3-92 UFLP ports
Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a
transmission board of the
base station
OUTSIDE side
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an external
transmission device
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Port Location
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a
transmission board
of the base station
150
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port Location
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Connector
Description
OUTSIDE side
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an
external
transmission device
3.3.5 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection
unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 3-55 shows the panel of a USLP2.
Figure 3-55 Panel of a USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-94 lists the ports on the
panel of the USLP2.
Table 3-94 Ports on the panel of the USLP2
Silkscreen on
the Panel
Port Type
Quantity
Description
4-pin
RJ45 connector
Figure 3-56 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on
the USLP2.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
151
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 3-56 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
OUT1
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
IN0
1
IN1
4
IN2
4
IN3
4
Table 3-95 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the
USLP2.
Table 3-95 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
Input
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Pin
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Pin
INO
IN0.1
OUT1
OUT1.1
IN1
IN2
IN3
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Output
IN0.2
OUT1.2
IN0.3
OUT1.4
IN0.4
OUT1.5
IN1.1
OUT1.3
IN1.2
OUT1.6
IN1.3
OUT1.7
IN1.4
OUT1.8
IN2.1
OUT0
OUT0.1
IN2.2
OUT0.2
IN2.3
OUT0.4
IN2.4
OUT0.5
IN3.1
OUT0.3
IN3.2
OUT0.6
IN3.3
OUT0.7
IN3.4
OUT0.8
152
DBS3900
Hardware Description
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the
SLPU.
3.4 WGRU
The WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information
and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock
signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS
positioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each base
station can be configured with a WGRU.
Exterior
Figure 3-57 shows a WGRU. Figure 3-58 shows a WGRU installed in a case.
Figure 3-57 WGRU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
153
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Panel
As shown in Figure 3-59, there are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the
WGRU.
As shown in Figure 3-60, there is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear
panel of the WGRU.
Figure 3-59 Front panel of a WGRU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
The WGRU is
running properly.
154
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
ALM
ACT
Color
Red
Green
Status
Description
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the
WGRU suite is
faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the
WGRU suite is
faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is
generated.
Steady on
An alarm is reported,
indicating a fault
during the operation.
Steady on
Steady off
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Description
PPS1
RJ45 connector
PPS2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
COM1
RJ45 connector
COM2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK1
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
155
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Connector
Description
POWER
ANT
3.5 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet
and reports related alarms.
The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the
environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following
items:
l
Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor
Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
156
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
157
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Battery Cabinets
The battery cabinets include the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D),
IBBS700D, and IBBS700T. Figure 4-2 shows the IBBS700D and IBBS700T, and Figure 4-3
shows other types of battery cabinets.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
158
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
159
DBS3900
Hardware Description
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-4 shows the OMB and OMB (Ver.C).
Figure 4-4 Exteriors of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)
IMB03/IFS06
Figure 4-5 shows the IMB03 and IFS06.
Figure 4-5 Exteriors of the IMB03 and IFS06
160
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
NOTE
For the functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.
The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used
for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power
distribution functions for distributed or separate base stations used outdoors and also
provide space for customer equipment.
The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The APM30 uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, and
the APM30H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and outer air circulation
fans to dissipate heat. The APM30 is configured with an APM power monitoring
interface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment
and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with a heat exchange
unit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.
The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a central
monitoring unit type A (CMUA) to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H
(Ver.A) uses a power distribution unit (PDU) to distribute power, and the APM30H
(Ver.B) uses an embedded power system (EPS) to distribute power. In addition, the
APM30H (Ver.B) uses an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type.
The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses a central
monitoring unit type E (CMUE) in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report
alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA to perform centralized monitoring.
The APM30H (Ver.C) uses an embedded power subrack unit (EPU), EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05, to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses an EPS to distribute
power.
The differences between the APM30H(Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms. The EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 installed in the APM30H(Ver.D) has higher power distribution capacity
than the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
The transmission cabinets (TMCs) are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The
TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed or separate
base stations and also provide space for customer equipment.
The differences between the TMC and TMC11H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and TMC11H
(Ver.B) reside in the monitoring mode. The TMC uses breathable film and fans to
dissipate heat, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and
outer air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The TMC uses an APMI and an AFMU to
monitor other components, the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA to monitor other
components, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA and a HERT power monitoring
interface unit (HPMI) to monitor other components. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B)
uses an ELU to report the cabinet type.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
161
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA
to perform centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a DCDU-03B to distribute power.
The differences between the TMC11H(Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a
DCDU-12B to distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power.
l
Battery cabinets are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The cabinets provide
space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for distributed or
separate base stations. The IBBS200D and IBBS200T differ in the heat dissipation mode.
The outdoor mini box (OMB) and OMB (Ver.C) apply to outdoor distributed base stations.
Their differences reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The OMB uses
an AC/DC power system or DCDU-03B to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, and the
OMB (Ver.C) uses an ETP48100-A1 or PDU10D-01 to supply power to the BBU and
RRUs. The OMB uses an HEUA to monitor fans and report alarms, and the OMB (Ver.C)
uses an HEUB to monitor fans and report alarms.
The indoor mini box 03 (IMB03) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It uses a BBU
and other customer equipment, and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor floor
installation support 06 (IFS06) applies to indoor distributed base stations, and supports
centralized installation of RRUs.
APM
The APM series cabinets are classified into APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),
APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H(Ver.D). Figure 4-6 shows the configurations of the APM
series cabinets.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
162
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Different types of the APM series cabinets use different heat dissipation, power distribution, and
monitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
APM30
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
PDU
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.
163
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.A)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
PDU
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.
164
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.B)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
165
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, a
signal
lightning
protection
unit (SLPU)
configured
with a
universal E1/
T1 lighting
protection
unit (UELP)
or/and a
universal FE/
GE lightning
protection
(UFLP) is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
EPS
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.B).
166
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPS,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
167
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
EPU
(EPU03A-0
3 or
EPU03A-05
)
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.C).
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.
168
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
169
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
EPU
(EPU05A-0
3 or
EPU05A-05
)
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.
170
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
TMC
The TMC series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),
TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H(Ver.D). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following types based on
different application scenarios:
l
Figure 4-7 shows TMC cabinets which provide space for the transmission equipment.
Figure 4-7 TMC series cabinets (1)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
171
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 4-8 shows the TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario.
Figure 4-8 TMC series cabinets (2)
Different types of TMC cabinets use different heat dissipation and monitoring modes, which are
supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
172
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The TMC
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
173
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
174
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
175
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
176
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
177
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-11
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-11B,
processing
baseband
signals.
178
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serving as a
transmission
cabinet
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
SLPU
Optional
When the
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
houses BBU
1 (leaf BBU),
an SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
installed in
the top 1 U
space of the
TMC11H
(Ver.D).
DCDU-12C
Mandatory
The
TMC11H
(Ver.D) is
configured
with a
DCDU-12C
when the
TMC
provides
space only
for the
transmission
equipment or
is configured
with BBU 1
(leaf BBU).
179
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serving as a
power
cabinet
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Optional
In triplemode
scenarios,
BBU 1 (leaf
BBU) can be
installed in
the TMC11H
(Ver.D).
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
180
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-12B
Mandatory
When the
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serves as a
power
cabinet, it is
configured
with a
DCDU-12B.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-12B,
processing
baseband
signals.
BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are classified into BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-9 shows the configurations of
the BBC or IBBS series cabinets.
Figure 4-9 Components in the BBC/IBBS series cabinets
The differences between the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T reside in the monitoring and heat
dissipation module configurations, as listed in Table 4-3.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
181
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBC
Power
supply box
for the
heating film
Mandatory
The power
supply box
feeds power
into the
heating film.
Ground bar
for the
cabinet
Mandatory
The ground
bar is used
for the
grounding of
the
components
in the
cabinet.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
BBC
Mandatory
The BBC
provides
power to
storage
batteries.
182
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.A)
TEC
Mandatory
The
thermoelectr
ic cooling
unit (TEC) is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heatdissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
Transfer
terminal for
the signal
cable
Mandatory
The transfer
terminal
block for the
signal cable
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet. It
consists of
four
interconnecti
on terminals.
183
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
IBBS200D
(Ver.B)/
(Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Transfer
terminal for
the input
power cable
for the TEC
Mandatory
The transfer
terminal for
the input
power cable
for the TEC
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Junction box
for the power
cable
Mandatory
The junction
box for the
power cable
is installed
on the inner
right side of
the
IBBS200T.
It consists of
the copper
bar, circuit
breaker for
the batteries,
and circuit
breaker for
the TEC.
Fan
Mandatory
The fan is
installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.
184
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
CMUA/
CMUE
Mandatory
A CMUA or
CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
Power
distribution
box
Optional
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
185
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)/
(Ver.C)
TEC
Mandatory
The TEC is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heatdissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
CMUA/
CMUE
Mandatory
A CMUA or
CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
186
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
IBBS200D
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Fan
Mandatory
The fan is
installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.
187
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
CMUEA
Mandatory
The
CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
188
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
TEC
Mandatory
The TEC is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heatdissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
CMUEA
Mandatory
The
CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
189
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
The following figure shows the interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
190
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.
Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
IBBS700D
Fan
mounting
frame
Mandatory
The fan
mounting
frame is
installed in
the lower
middle in the
front door of
the cabinet,
and
configured
with a fan.
191
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CMUEA
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type EA
(CMUEA)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
3 and 4
ELU
Mandatory
The
electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 4.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 3.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
192
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CCU
The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600AH17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
AC Junction
box
Mandatory
The AC
junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.
HAU01A-01
Optional
The Heater
Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.
193
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
IBBS700T
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
Storage
battery
Mandatory
16
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Door status
sensor
Mandatory
The door
status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.
10
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Inner air
circulation
fan
Mandatory
194
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
TEC
Mandatory
To dissipate
heat from the
storage
batteries, the
TEC ensures
the normal
operation of
the cabinet in
hightemperature
areas.
Outer air
circulation
fan
Mandatory
CMUF
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
195
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
5 and 6
ELU
Mandatory
The
electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 6.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 5.
CCU
The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600AH17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
196
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
AC Junction
box
Mandatory
The AC
junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.
HAU01A-01
Optional
The Heater
Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.
10
Storage
battery
Mandatory
16
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
11
Door status
sensor
Mandatory
The door
status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.
197
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
12
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-11 shows the configurations of OMBs, including the AC and DC OMBs.
Figure 4-11 Configuration of the OMBs
The AC OMB and DC OMB have different power equipment and use different surge protection
methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-5.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
198
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
AC OMB
HEUA
Mandatory
The HEUA
provides
power for the
fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the
fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information
and power
surge
protection
alarm
information,
and reports
the collected
information
to the BBU.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
on the left
side of the
cabinet,
processing
baseband
signals.
AC surge
protection
box
Mandatory
The AC
surge
protection
box provides
surge
protection
for the AC
input power.
199
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
DC OMB
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
AC/DC
power
equipment
Mandatory
The AC/DC
power
equipment
converts 220
V AC power
to -48 V DC
power.
HEUA
Mandatory
The HEUA
provides
power for the
fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the
fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information
and power
surge
protection
alarm
information,
and reports
the collected
information
to the BBU.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
on the left
side of the
cabinet,
processing
baseband
signals.
200
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components
in the
cabinet.
Figure 4-12 shows the configuration of OMBs (Ver.C), including the AC OMB (Ver.C) and
DC OMB (Ver.C).
Figure 4-12 Configuration of the OMBs (Ver.C)
The AC OMB (Ver.C) and DC OMB (Ver.C) have different power equipment and use different
surge protection methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-6.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
201
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
AC OMB
(Ver.C)
ELU
Mandatory
The ELU
automaticall
y reports the
cabinet type.
PMU 11A
Mandatory
The PMU
11A
provides
power
system,
power
monitoring
function, and
alarm
reporting
function.
HEUB
Mandatory
The HEUB
provides
power for the
fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the
fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information
and power
surge
protection
alarm
information,
and reports
the collected
information
to the BBU.
202
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
PSU
(R4850G2)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 110
V/220 V AC
power into
-48 V DC.
BBU3900
Mandatory
The
BBU3900
processes
baseband
signals and
enables
interaction
between the
base station
and base
station
controller.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
dissipates
heat from the
cabinet. Two
fan
assemblies
are
separately
installed at
the left
bottom and
the left top of
the OMB.
PDU10D-01
Mandatory
The
PDU10D-01
is a DC
power
distribution
unit
supplying
-48 V DC
power to all
components
in the
cabinet.
203
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
DC OMB
(Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SPD
Mandatory
The SPD
provides
surge
protection
for the AC
input power.
ETP48100A1
Mandatory
The
embedded
telecommuni
cation power
A1
(ETP48100A1) converts
external AC
input power
into DC
power.
ELU
Mandatory
The ELU
automaticall
y reports the
cabinet type.
204
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
HEUB
Mandatory
The HEUB
provides
power for the
fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the
fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information
and power
surge
protection
alarm
information,
and reports
the collected
information
to the BBU.
BBU3900
Mandatory
The
BBU3900
processes
baseband
signals and
enables
interaction
between the
base station
and base
station
controller.
205
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
dissipates
heat from the
cabinet. Two
fan
assemblies
are
separately
installed at
the left
bottom and
the left top of
the OMB.
PDU10D-01
Mandatory
PDU10D-01
is a DC
power
distribution
unit.
IMB03
The IMB03 is classified into the AC and DC IMB03, of which the configurations are shown in
Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 IMB03 cabinets
The AC IMB03 and DC IMB03 have different power equipment. Table 4-7 lists the components
configured in each IMB03 cabinet.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
206
DBS3900
Hardware Description
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
AC IMB03
AC/DC
power
equipment
Mandatory
The AC/DC
power
equipment
converts 220
V AC power
to -48 V DC
power.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components
in the
cabinet.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
DC IMB03
TP48600A
The TP48600A supports AC power input. Figure 4-14 shows the interior of the TP48600A.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
207
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
208
DBS3900
Hardware Description
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TP48600A
FAU02D-07
Mandatory
The
FAU02D-07
is a fan
assembly
unit used for
the
equipment
compartmen
t. It consists
of two fans
and a central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF).
The fans
dissipate
heat from the
cabinet.
The
FAU02D-07
is shortened
to FAU in
this
document.
2
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
CCU
Mandatory
The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and controls
equipment.
209
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
ETP
Mandatory
The
embedded
telecommuni
cation power
(ETP)
system
converts AC
power into
DC power
and supplies
power to all
the
equipment
inside the
cabinet. The
ETP consists
of the ETP
subrack,
PMU, and
PSUs.
210
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
R4850G2
Mandatory
The
R4850G2
converts 110
V AC or 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC power.
It is
shortened to
PSU in this
document.
6
PMU 10 A
Mandatory
The power
monitoring
unit 10 A
(PMU 10 A)
provides the
following
functions:
power
system and
battery
management
, power
monitoring,
and alarm
reporting.
It is
shortened to
PMU in this
document.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DCDU-11C
Mandatory
Direct
current
distribution
unit-11C
(DCDU-11C
) provides
ten DC
outputs for
the BBU,
CCU, and
CMUF in the
cabinet.
211
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The
baseband
processing
unit
(BBU3900),
which
processes
baseband
signals, is
installed
under the
DCDU-11C.
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to
RRUs. When
only one
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
is
configured,
it is
preferentiall
y configured
in the left
slot.
10
PDU05A-03
Mandatory
The
PDU05A-3
provides AC
power for the
ETP.
11
Storage
battery
Optional
The storage
battery
provides
backup
power for a
base station.
212
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
12
CMUF
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
provides the
following
functions:
heat
exchanger
control, fan
speed
adjustment,
and ELU
identificatio
n.
13
HAU
Optional
The heater
assembly
unit (HAU)
ensures that
components
in the cabinet
work within
the
acceptable
temperature
range when
the
surrounding
temperature
is low. It is
optional.
14
Fan
Mandatory
Fans
dissipate
heat from a
cabinet.
213
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
15
Space for
customer
equipment
16
Document
holder
Mandatory
The
document
holder is
used to hold
documents.
214
DBS3900
Hardware Description
For details about the IBBS700D, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700D in
Engineering Specifications.
For details about the IBBS700T, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700T in Engineering
Specifications.
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
Ambient temperature
-27.4 oF to 122 oF
NOTE
The temperature alarm lower threshold is -33oC
(-27.4oF).
Relative humidity
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
5% RH to 100% RH
215
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature
-4oF to 122oF
HEUA
The Heat Exchange Unit Type A (HEUA) monitors the fans and reports the related alarms.
Structure
The HEUA is the heat exchange monitoring unit. Figure 4-15 shows the HEUA.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
216
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Figure 4-16 shows the ports on the HEUA, and Table 4-12 describes the ports on the HEUA.
Figure 4-16 Ports on the HEUA
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
SN
Port
Quantity
Function
Leading DC input
power to the HEUA
2 and 3
4-pin sockets
Providing the
terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
outer air circulation
fans
LEDs
Indicating the
running status and
alarm status of the
fans
217
DBS3900
Hardware Description
SN
Port
Quantity
Function
5 and 6
RJ45 ports
Short-circuiting cap
Differentiating the
APM30H or
TMC11H from other
cabinets
8 and 9
4-pin sockets
Providing the
terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
inner air circulation
fans
Exterior
Figure 4-17 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 4-17 AC/DC power equipment
(6) PSU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
218
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Table 4-13 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-13 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power
supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
Monitoring
port
RS232
Reserved
RS485
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
LOAD1
H4
LOAD2
H4
BATT
H4
RRU
OT terminal
TM
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output
wiring
terminals
Indicator
Table 4-14 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-14 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
Steady off
219
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
ALARM
Yellow
Alarm indicator
Steady on
Blinking
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
FAULT
Red
Fault indicator
Table 4-15 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-15 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
DIP Switch
Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switches.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
220
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
221
DBS3900
Hardware Description
No.
Function
Setting
7 and 8
Specifications
Table 4-17 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-17 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item
Specifications
Input voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Output current
2 kV in differential mode
4 kV in common mode
Exterior
Figure 4-19 shows the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
222
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Table 4-18 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-18 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Name
Label
Description
Connector
Alarm port
SPD ALM
OT terminal
N
PE
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each
component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
223
DBS3900
Hardware Description
into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application
scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 4-20 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-20 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Functions
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker
configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and
separated base stations.
Table 4-19 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-19 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
12 A
Distributed
base station/
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
Transmissio
n cabinet
224
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
Applicatio
n Scenario
Ports
Figure 4-21 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-21 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,
225
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
Technical Specifications
Table 4-21 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-21 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Item
Specification
Dimension (H x W x D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
226
DBS3900
Hardware Description
HEUB
The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status
of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge
protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
Panel
Figure 4-22 shows the HEUB panel.
Figure 4-22 HEUB panel
(1) ELU
(2) ExtFAN
(3) IntFAN
(4) TEM
(5) AC_SPD
(6) GATE
(7) COM_IN
(8) COM_OUT
(9) PWR
Functions
The HEUB performs the following functions:
l
Collects the surge protection alarm information of power equipment when AC power is
used.
Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature
or controlled by the BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
227
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Table 4-22 describes the ports on the HEUB.
Table 4-22 Ports on the HEUB
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
ELU
RJ45 connector
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
IntFAN
4-pin connector
TEM
4-pin connector
AC_SPD
Bare wire
GATE
Bare wire
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
PWR
ETP48100-A1
The embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external 220 V or 110
V AC input power into -48 V DC power.
ETP48100-A1 Components
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) system consists of the
power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A), power supply unit (PSU), and ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-23 shows the ETP48100-A1 components.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
228
DBS3900
Hardware Description
(2) PSU
ETP48100-A1 Subrack
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) subrack houses the PMU
11A and PSU. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power.
Exterior
Figure 4-24 shows an ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-24 ETP48100-A1 subrack
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Circuit breaker
LOAD0/LOAD1
DC output terminal
OUTPUT
OT terminal
229
DBS3900
Hardware Description
PMU 11A
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power
distribution, and reports alarms.
Exterior
Figure 4-25 shows a PMU 11A.
Figure 4-25 PMU 11A
Functions
The PMU 11A performs the following functions:
l
Ports
Figure 4-26 shows the ports on the PMU 11A and Table 4-24 describes these ports.
Figure 4-26 Ports on the PMU 11A
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
230
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
GATE
2-pin connector
TEM_BAT
2-pin connector
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
COM_485
RJ45 connector
Reserved
Indicators
Table 4-25 describes the indicators on the PMU 11A.
Table 4-25 Indicators on the PMU 11A
Silkscre
en
Color
Description
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
Steady off
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Red
Alarm indicator
231
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Silkscre
en
Color
Description
Status
Description
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
DIP Switches
Figure 4-27 shows the DIP switches on the PMU 11A.
Figure 4-27 DIP switches on the PMU 11A
Function
Setting
Four least
significan
t bits (1,
2, 3, and
4)
Define the
monitoring address
of the PMU.
The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
1 to 4 are set to 1100 by default before delivery.
Four most
significan
t bits (5,
6, 7, and
8)
The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
5 to 8 are set to 0000 by default before delivery.
PSU
The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
Functions
The PSU implements the following functions:
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
232
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The power monitoring unit
(PMU) adjusts the output voltage.
Exterior
Figure 4-28 shows the PSU exterior.
Figure 4-28 PSU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the
PSU.
Indicators
Figure 4-29 shows the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.
Figure 4-29 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU
Table 4-27 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
233
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Color
Status
Description
Power
indicato
r
Green
Steady on
Steady off
Protecti
on
indicato
r
Yellow
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
Steady on
Fault
indicato
r
Red
PDU10D-01
The power distribution unit 10D-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power to all components
in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-30 shows a PDU10D-01.
Figure 4-30 PDU10D-01
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
234
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions:
l
Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.
Provides ten DC outputs with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and
two reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-31 shows ports on the PDU10D-01 and Table 4-28 describes these ports.
Figure 4-31 Ports on the PDU10D-01
Port
Silkscreen
Matched
Terminal and
Cable
Description
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6). The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable supported is
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
for one input or 16
mm2 (0.025 in.2) for
two inputs.
RTN(+)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
235
DBS3900
Hardware Description
No
.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched
Terminal and
Cable
Description
AC input
terminals
L, N, PE
One-hole OT
terminal (M4). The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable supported is 4
mm2 (0.0062 2).
DC output
terminals
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
DC output
terminals
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
NOTE
Figure 4-33 shows
an EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
connected to a cable
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before
delivery. The EPC5
connector must be
connected to the
cable onsite.
Spare fuse
box
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
236
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Exterior
Figure 4-34 shows the panel of an AC surge protection box.
Figure 4-34 Panel of the AC surge protection box
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
237
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Table 4-29 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
ALARM
Bare wire
AC power supply
port
AC power supply
port
N
PE
Exterior
Figure 4-35 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 4-35 AC/DC power equipment
(6) PSU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
238
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Table 4-30 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-30 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power
supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
Monitoring
port
RS232
Reserved
RS485
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
LOAD1
H4
LOAD2
H4
BATT
H4
RRU
OT terminal
TM
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output
wiring
terminals
Indicator
Table 4-31 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-31 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
Steady off
Alarm indicator
Steady on
Blinking
ALARM
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Yellow
239
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Label
FAULT
Color
Red
Name
Fault indicator
Status
Description
Steady off
Steady on
Steady off
Table 4-32 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-32 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
DIP Switch
Figure 4-36 shows the DIP switches.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
240
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
241
DBS3900
Hardware Description
No.
Function
Setting
7 and 8
Specifications
Table 4-34 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-34 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item
Specifications
Input voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Output current
2 kV in differential mode
4 kV in common mode
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each
component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified
into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application
scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 4-37 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
242
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker
configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and
separated base stations.
Table 4-35 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-35 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
12 A
Distributed
base station/
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
Transmissio
n cabinet
243
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Figure 4-38 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-38 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,
244
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
Technical Specifications
Table 4-37 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-37 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Item
Specification
Dimension (H x W x D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
245
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-39 and Figure 4-40 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-39 Front view of a DCDU-12B
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-38 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
246
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DC output
ports
PowerConsuming
Device
Specificatio
n of the
Fuse
Remarks
DCDU-12B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
30 A
LOAD6
BBU or
transmission
device
l
l
l
l
LOAD7
BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9
Fan assembly
BTS3900
BTS3900A
DBS3900
Mini NodeB
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
l The LOAD6 to LOAD8 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 1.5mm2 (0.002
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-41 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Figure 4-41 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
247
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 4-39 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Table 4-39 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
cross-sectional area
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).
RTN(+)
(2)
Fuse
block
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
248
DBS3900
Hardware Description
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(3)
DC
output
ports
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
l Figure 4-42
shows the EPC5
connectors for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
l Figure 4-43
shows an EPC4/
EPC6 connector,
which applies to
any one among
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
Figure 4-43 shows an
EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
connected to a cable
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before delivery.
The EPC5 connector
must be connected to
the cable onsite.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
249
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 4-40 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-40 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each
component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified
into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application
scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 4-44 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
250
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Functions
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker
configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and
separated base stations.
Table 4-41 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-41 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
12 A
Distributed
base station/
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
Transmissio
n cabinet
251
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Ports
Figure 4-45 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-45 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,
252
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
Technical Specifications
Table 4-43 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-43 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Item
Specification
Dimension (H x W x D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
253
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Exterior
Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
respectively.
Figure 4-46 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
254
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B uses
the equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the open
rack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,
which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear of
the DCDU-11B.
Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breaker
configurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro base
station.
Table 4-44 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Table 4-44 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
DCDU
Type
DC
Output
Termina
l
Equipment
Circuit
Breaker
Specifica
tions
Circuit
Breaker
Description
DCDU-11
B
LOAD0
to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
25 A
SW0 to
SW5
Distributed or
mini base station
LOAD6
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW6
LOAD7
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW7
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
equipment
25 A
SW8
LOAD9
Fan assembly
25 A
SW9
LOAD0
Transmission
equipment
6A
SW0
LOAD1
Transmission
equipment
6A
SW1
LOAD2
Transmission
equipment
12 A
SW2
LOAD3
Transmission
equipment
12 A
SW3
LOAD4
Transmission
equipment
25 A
SW4
DCDU-11
C
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
-48 V outdoor
macro base
station or
transmission
cabinet
255
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DCDU
Type
DC
Output
Termina
l
Equipment
Circuit
Breaker
Specifica
tions
Circuit
Breaker
LOAD5
Transmission
equipment
25 A
SW5
LOAD6
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW6
LOAD7
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW7
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
equipment
25 A
SW8
LOAD9
Fan assembly
25 A
SW9
Description
Ports
Figure 4-48 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Figure 4-48 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Table 4-45 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
256
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Label
Terminal and
Cable
Description
(1)
DC input
terminal
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable is 35mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25mm2
(0.039in.2) in two
inputs.
RTN(+)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
257
DBS3900
Hardware Description
S
N
Port
Label
Terminal and
Cable
Description
(2)
DC
output
terminal
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
DCDU-11B:
l Figure 4-49
shows an toolless female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
terminals. The
cross-sectional
area is 3.3mm2
(0.005 in.2) to
10mm2 (0.015 in.
2).
l Figure 4-50
shows an toolless female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
terminals. The
maximum crosssectional area is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
DCDU-11C: Figure
4-50 shows an toolless female connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to LOAD0
to LOAD9 terminals.
The cross-sectional
area is 1.5mm2
(0.002 in.2) to 4mm2
(0.006 in.2).
(3)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Circuit
breaker
SW0 to SW9
258
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 4-46 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C.
Table 4-46 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C
Item
Specification
Dimension (H x W x D)
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
259
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Exterior
Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-51 Front view of a DCDU-12B
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-47 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.
Table 4-47 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
DCDU Type
DC output
ports
PowerConsuming
Device
Specificatio
n of the
Fuse
Remarks
DCDU-12B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
30 A
l BTS3900
260
DBS3900
Hardware Description
DCDU Type
DC output
ports
PowerConsuming
Device
LOAD6
BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD7
BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9
Fan assembly
Specificatio
n of the
Fuse
Remarks
l BTS3900A
l DBS3900
l Mini NodeB
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
l The LOAD6 to LOAD8 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 1.5mm2 (0.002
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-53 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Figure 4-53 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel
Table 4-48 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
261
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
cross-sectional area
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).
RTN(+)
(2)
Fuse
block
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
262
DBS3900
Hardware Description
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(3)
DC
output
ports
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
l Figure 4-54
shows the EPC5
connectors for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
l Figure 4-55
shows an EPC4/
EPC6 connector,
which applies to
any one among
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
Figure 4-55 shows an
EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
connected to a cable
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before delivery.
The EPC5 connector
must be connected to
the cable onsite.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
263
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Technical Specifications
Table 4-49 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-49 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
264
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Lowest Operating
Temperature of the User
Equipment
Highest Operating
Temperature of the User
Equipment
Figure 4-56 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
from its left and right
from its front and rear
The equipment installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.B), and
TMC11H (Ver.C) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
265
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.)
l
Lowest Operating
Temperature of the User
Equipment
Highest Operating
Temperature of the User
Equipment
Figure 4-57 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
from its left and right
from its front and rear
266
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Rated Voltage
Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220/380 V AC three-phase
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V
AC
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V
AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V
AC
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V
AC
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
+24 V DC
+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
267
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
268
DBS3900
Hardware Description
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supply in the APM30 or APM30H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30 or
APM30H (Ver.A)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 32 A/1 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
220 V AC threephase
1 x 20 A/3 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 32 A/2 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supply in the TMC or TMC11H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-5.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
269
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-5 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 63 A/
1 P, maximum: 1 x 80
A/1 P
15 m (49.21 ft)
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU3900 is installed
in the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
270
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
APM30H (Ver.C)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x63 A/1 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A/2 P
16mm2
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-8. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger.
Table 5-8 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
TMC11H (Ver.B)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
15 m (49.21 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-9.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
271
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-9 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Maximum
Configuration (1)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
1x80 A
1x63 A
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
1x160 A
2x80 A
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
1x80 A
1x100 A
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
272
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Maximum
Configuration (1)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
(power 350
W) (6)
2x63 A
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
1x63 A
1x100 A
2x63 A
1x160 A
2x63 A
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
1x160 A
(2)(3)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
273
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
2x63 A
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
NOTE
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,
RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3841,
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-11B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order of load capacity as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A >
2x63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRXs in the base station. To power off the base station, first
turn off the circuit breakers for all TRXs and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups of
power inputs.
274
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied, a heater must be installed in
a TMC cabinet, and one more AC power input must be added. The recommended configurations
of circuit breakers and power cables in this circumstance are listed in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
for the heater
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Description of
Input Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
1 x 10 A/1 P
15 m (39.37 ft.)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with +24 V DC power supplied and is configured with
a APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power
cables are listed in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
the APM30H (Ver.B)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
Minimum: 1x160 A,
maximum: 2x100 A
15 m (49.21 ft)
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-12.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
275
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-12 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x40 A/3 P
15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x100 A/1 P
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A/1 P
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-13.
Table 5-13 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
the TMC11H (Ver.D)
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
1x80 A/1 P
1x63 A/1 P
1x160 A/1 P
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
276
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Maximum
Configuration (1)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
2x80 A/1 P
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
1x80 A/1 P
1x80 A/1 P
1x63 A/1 P
1x100 A/1 P
2x63 A/1 P
(2)(3)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 3 RRUs (power <
300 W)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
277
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Maximum
Configuration (1)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
1x160 A/1 P
2x63 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
1x160 A/1 P
2x63 A/1 P
l 7 to 9 RRUs
(power
consumption
300 W)
(2)(3)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs
(power
consumption
560 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
278
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 12 RRUs (power
consumption
300 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
2x80 A/1 P
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (300 W
power
consumption
400 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power
consumption
560 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
2x160 A/1 P
279
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,
RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3841,
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-12B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A > 2x63 A > 100
A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station,
first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for both
groups of power inputs.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
280
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-14 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
cabinet
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
40m
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 5-15 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
(Ver.C) cabinet
Power Supply
Product
Configuration
Requirement
for the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
CrossSectional
Area of the
Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power
Cable
220 V AC
single-phase
1PSU
20 A/1 P
15m
2PSU
32 A/1 P
110 V AC duallive-wire
1PSU
20 A/2 P
2PSU
32 A/2 P
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB or
OMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are
separately listed in Table 5-16 and Table 5-17.
Table 5-16 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB used)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A,
maximum: 1x80 A
(all using the level-1
magnetic blast
breaker)
15m
281
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-17 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB (Ver.C) used)
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
50 A/1 P
10 m (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
80 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
63 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
282
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
100 A/1 P
2x63 A/2 P
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
80 A/1 P
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
125 A/1 P
2x63 A/2 P
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
80 A/1 P
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
283
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
2x63 A/2 P
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
100 A/1 P
2x63 A/2 P
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
100 A/1 P
Length of the
Input Power Cable
284
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
2x63 A/2 P
Length of the
Input Power Cable
NOTE
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is equal to or less than 300 W: RRU3804,
RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, and RRU3004.
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3908,
RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3828,
RRU3928, and RRU3222.
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3829,
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240,
RRU3229, RRU3241, and RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03,
the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately listed in
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
285
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-18 and Table 5-19. When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU
is installed in the 19-inch rack or on a wall indoors, the configurations of the upper-level circuit
breaker and power cable are separately listed in Table 5-19.
Table 5-18 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
is used in the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 5-19 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
is used in the DC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
15 m (49.21 ft)
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03
+IFS06, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately
listed in Table 5-20 and Table 5-21.
Table 5-20 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
+IFS06 is used in the AC power supply scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P
15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x32 A/1 P
286
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x32 A/2 P
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
Table 5-21 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
+IFS06 is used in the DC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x80 A/1 P
15 m (49.21 ft)
+24 V DC
2x100 A/1 P
1x160 A/1 P
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power Supply
Product
Configuration
Requirement
for the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
CrossSectional
Area of the
Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power
Cable
220 V AC threephase
7 power supply
units (PSUs)+1
service outlet
unit (SOU)
63 A/3 P(1)
(recommended)
10 mm2 (0.016
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1
SOU
40 A/3 P
287
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power Supply
220 V AC
single-phase
110 V AC duallive-wire
Product
Configuration
Requirement
for the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
4 to 7 PSUs+1
HAU+1 SOU
63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
(recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
(recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/2 P
CrossSectional
Area of the
Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power
Cable
35 mm2 (0.054
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
35 mm2 (0.054
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
NOTE
(1) P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
288
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-1 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 220 V AC single-phase power
supply scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
289
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-2 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
supply scenario
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-3 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC single-phase
power supply scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
290
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-4 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire
power supply scenario
Table 5-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.B) in
the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers
for the PDU
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3 x 16 A (MCB1)
110 V AC dual-livewire
2 x 30 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1 x 10 A
l Heating film: 1 x
10 A
l RRU: 6 20 A
l BBU: 1 12 A
l FAN: 1 12 A
l TM2: 2 4 A
NOTE
When the DBS3900 uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission
cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan box,
and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure
5-5.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
291
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the
AC power supply
Table 5-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
uses the AC power supply
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) +
Transmission cabinet
220 V AC
l TM: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1
x 6 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
292
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Table 5-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC
power supply scenario
Cabinet Type
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A)
One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
293
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-26 lists the specifications of
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
294
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-26 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPS
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3x16 A (MCB(1))
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A
(MCB)
l Battery (BAT)(2):
1x100 A (MCB)
l RRU: 6x20 A
(MCB)
l Transmission
cabinet (TMC):
1x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE(3))
l BBU: 2x15 A
(FUSE)
l Thermoelectric
cooling unit
(TEC)(4): 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l Transmission
equipment (TM)
(5): 4x15 A
(FUSE)
l SOU: 1x16 A
(MCB)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
295
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-27 lists the specifications of
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
296
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-27 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPS
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3x20 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A
(MCB)
l BAT: 1x160 A
(MCB)
l RRU: 6x25 A
(MCB)
l TMC: 1x30 A
(MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l BBU: 2x25 A
(FUSE)
l TEC: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x15 A
(FUSE)
l SOU: 1x15 A
(MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
297
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-28 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-28 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
uses the AC power supply
Cabinet Type
Transmission cabinet
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
298
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-12 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-29 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-29 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
uses the AC power supply
Cabinet Type
Transmission cabinet
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
299
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-30 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type
TMC11H (Ver.B)
When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C), and
the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly.
Figure 5-14 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 5-31 lists
the specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
300
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-31 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
301
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-32 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type
One output provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).
One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
302
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC singlephase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting
bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.
Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.D) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-33 lists the specifications of
circuit breakers and fuses in the or APM30H (Ver.D) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power
supply scenarios.
Figure 5-16 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 220 V AC singlephase power supply
Figure 5-17 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 110 V AC dual-live
power supply
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
303
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-33 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses AC
power supply
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPU
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
2x40 A+1x25 A
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A
Heater: 1x16 A
(MCB)
l BAT: 1x125 A/
2P (MCB)
l RFC: 1x125 A
(MCB)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5:
6x30 A (FUSE)
l BBU: 2x30 A
(FUSE)
l FAN: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x30 A
(FUSE)
l TMC: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l IBBS: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
NOTE
When a site is configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU. In
this case, the RFC1 terminal on the EPU feeds external DC power into the DCDU-12B, which provides
power inputs for the RRUs, as shown in Figure 5-19.
When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides power
supply for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, as
shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
304
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-34 lists the specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-34 Specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC
power supply
Cabinet Type
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
305
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-35 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type
TMC11H (Ver.D)
serving as a power
cabinet
Table 5-36 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
OMB
220 V AC single-phase or
110 V AC dual-live-wire
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
306
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-21 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) when the 220 V AC
single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-37 lists the specifications
of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-21
Table 5-37 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C)
220 V AC single-phase or
110 V AC dual-live-wire
NOTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
307
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-22 Power Distribution Principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
Table 5-38 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
OMB
-48 V DC
Figure 5-23 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario. Table 5-39 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base
station.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
308
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-23
Table 5-39 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C)
-48 V DC
309
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-24 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC power
supply scenario
Table 5-40 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or
110 V AC dual-live-wire
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
310
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-42 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses
-48 V DC
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
311
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Table 5-43 Specifications of circuit breakers in the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
IMB03+IFS06
+24 V DC
One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and
divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.
Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs into DC
power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, and
storage batteries.
Figure 5-28 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied
and the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 5-29 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC
three-phase power is supplied and the DCDU-03B is used. Table 5-44 lists the specifications
of circuit breakers.
The power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V
AC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for the cabinet
supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The difference among the power distribution
schemes for the three types of power inputs lies in the configuration of the short-circuiting bars,
as shown in Figure 5-30.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
312
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-28 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-11B)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
313
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 5-29 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-03B)
Specifications of AC
Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
PDU05A-03
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A
l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A
l HEATER: 1x25 A
l SOU: 1x10 A
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
314
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Power Distribution
Equipment
Specifications of AC
Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
ETP
l DCDU-11C: LOAD0
(1x100 A)
l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B:
LOAD3 (1x200 A) and
LOAD5 (1x200 A)
l TMC11H (Ver.C):
LOAD1 and LOAD2
(1x100 A)
l Storage batteries:
LOAD6 (1x400 A)
l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200
A)
DCDU-11C
DCDU-11B
DCDU-03B
NOTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
315
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
316
DBS3900
Hardware Description
317
DBS3900
Hardware Description
When an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
318
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The BBU in a DBS3900 can be installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet in a single- or dualmode scenario.
The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description
about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30.
Figure 6-1 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30
APM30
APM30
APMI
APMI
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
ALM0/ALM1
MON0 / MON1
AFMU
PMU
APM30
APMI
AFMU
PMU
AFMU
PMU
TX RX
RS232/RS422
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC
Door Status
Sensor
BBU
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
APMI
Wiring terminal
for the surge
protection alarm
signal cable on
the DCDU
BBU
TMC
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
APMI
AFMU
Wiring terminal
for the surge
protection alarm
signal cable on
the DCDU
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
AFMU
Door Status
Sensor
Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/
IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The devices monitored by the
HEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
319
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.A)
BAT
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
COM
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU
HPMI
HPMI
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
PMU
HEUA
HEUA
PMU
HEUA
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
RS232/RS422
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC11H(Ver.A)
HEUA
BBU
BBU
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
TMC11H(Ver.A)
HEUA
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC/TMC11H
TMC/TMC11H
COM_IN / COM1
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
BBU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
320
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The CUMUA is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), and the CMUE is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) use the same monitoring scheme. The devices monitored by
the CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the
boards.
l
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power
Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Figure 6-4 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
HPMI
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
PMU
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
MON0 / MON1
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
TO PMU DB50
COM
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
BBU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
CMUA/CMUE
BBU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
Figure 6-5 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Figure 6-5 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
COM_485
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
BBU
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
BBU
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
321
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered
and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the outdoor scenario.
Figure 6-6 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring scheme when two the BBU is configured in one of the two
TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.
Figure 6-7 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.B)
Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 6-8 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario
COM_IN
APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
ALM
PRESENT
CMUA
MON0 / MON1
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Power System
(DC/DC)
BBU
322
DBS3900
Hardware Description
BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM30H
(Ver.B) or main APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM30H
(Ver.B) or extension APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. In a triple-mode base station, all monitoring
devices are connected to BBU0. The monitoring scheme for a triple-mode base station is the
same as a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, and Figure
6-11.
Figure 6-9 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
Figure 6-10 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBSs
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
323
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-11 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBUs are installed in the TMC11Hs
(Ver.B)/TMC11Hs (Ver.C)
The devices monitored by the CMUEA, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see
the description about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUEA, see Central Monitoring Unit Type
EA (CMUEA).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU.
Figure 6-12 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-12 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
324
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-13 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-13 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)
The following figure illustrates the monitoring scheme for the base station configured with of 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
NOTE
The monitoring board in an IBBS700D cabinet is the CMUEA and the monitoring board in an IBBS700T
cabinet is the CMUF.
Figure 6-14 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T
Figure 6-15 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are
powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
325
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-15 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-16 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs
(Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) that is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 6-16 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.D)
BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the 220 V AC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one APM30H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the APM30H (Ver.D) or in the
transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme. Figure 6-17 and Figure
6-18 show the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
326
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-17 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-18 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
When the -48 V DC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one TMC11H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the TMC11H (Ver.D) that serves as a
power cabinet or in the transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme.
Figure 6-19 shows the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
327
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-19 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUB, see HEUB.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the OMB, see AC/DC Power
Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU 11A in the OMB (Ver.C), see PMU
11A.
Figure 6-20 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB in the
110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-21 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-20 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
328
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-21 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB
Figure 6-22 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB (Ver.C)
in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-23 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-22 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 6-23 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
329
DBS3900
Hardware Description
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU on the AC/DC power equipment in the
IMB03, see AC/DC Power Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the AC/DC power system in the
IMB03, see PMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).
NOTE
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).
BBU
PMU
Monitoring from
source to destination
Figure 6-25 illustrates the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU
+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the
BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed on the IFS06. Figure 6-26 shows the
monitoring principles for the cabinet using the +24 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-25 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (110 V/
220 V) scenario
IMB03
COM_IN / COM1
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
BBU
IMB03
PMU
Figure 6-26 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (+24 V)
scenario
IMB03
ALM
PRESENT
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
BBU
IMB03
Power System
(DC/DC)
330
DBS3900
Hardware Description
l The indoor solution of BBU+RRU+IMB03 does not support the triple-mode scenario. The solution of
BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 supports the triple-mode scenario.
l BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR is used in the triple-mode scenario, two BBUs
need to be configured: BBU 0 and BBU 1. BBU 0 is installed in No.0 IMB03. It monitors No.
0 IMB03 and No.1 IMB03. BBU 1 is installed in No.3 IMB03. It monitors No.2 IMB03 and No.
3 IMB03. For details, see Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-27 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V)
scenario
Figure 6-28 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (-48 V) scenario
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
331
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about the boards. For monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.7 Customized Alarm Input.
l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see PMU.
l For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see CCU.
l For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in different cabinets, see Configurations of Cabinets
Used by the DBS3900.
l When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected
to the MON0 port on one of the boards, the MON0 port on the other board must not be used, and the
MON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.
Figure 6-29 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
332
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-30 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
NOTE
If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lower-level
device. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 6-29 are not configured, the monitoring
signal cable can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU.
In this document, BBU0 and BBU1 are used to exemplify two triple-mode BBUs.
l In a base station to be expanded, BBU0 is installed during initial site construction, and BBU1 is installed
during capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 works in LTEonly or UMTS-only mode.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
333
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Figure 6-31 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-32 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
334
DBS3900
Hardware Description
The alarms are collected by the UPEU/UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for universal
power and environment interface unit, and UEIU is short for universal environment
interface unit.
The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the
related initial configuration guide. EMUA is short for environment monitoring unit type
A.
Application
Scenario
Number of
Boolean Outputs
to Be Monitored
Monitoring Board
Configurations
-48 V DC/220 V AC
Indoor DBS3900
(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed
indoors)
None
UPEU
1 to 16 channels
UPEU+UEIU
17 to 32 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA
Outdoor DBS3900
(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed
outdoors)
None
UPEU
1 to 16 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)
17 to 32 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA
NOTE
l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.
l Two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) and one signal lightning protection
unit (SLPU) are delivered together.
l The EMUA with sensors can be configured, if required, for the indoor DBS3900.
335
DBS3900
Hardware Description
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU
and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU/UEIU by using BBU alarm cables.
Table 6-2 describes the mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 and the customized alarm
numbers.
Table 6-2 Mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 on the USLP2 and the customized
alarm numbers
Pins of
the
Ports
IN0 to
IN3
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
4+
5+
0+
1+
12+
13+
8+
9+
4(GND)
5(GND)
0(GND)
1(GND)
12(GND)
13(GND)
8(GND)
9(GND)
6(GND)
7+
2(GND)
3+
14(GND)
15+
10(GND)
11+
6+
7(GND)
2+
3(GND)
14+
15(GND)
10+
11(GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.3.5 USLP2. For details about pin assignment for
the wires of a BBU alarm cable, see 7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE
The SLPU used as an alarm signal surge protection unit is configured with two USLP2s by default before
delivery. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot, and
the USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.
336
DBS3900
Hardware Description
CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details
about cable connections, see Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34 Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms (1)
RS-485
SENSOR
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU
reports the alarms to the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the remote
radio unit (RRU) through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms (2)
RRU
ALM
COM_OUT
COM_IN
COM_IN
COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU
EMUA
RS-485
SENSOR
When the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A, customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that
connects to the cabinet control unit (CCU). Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to the BBU
through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-36.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
337
DBS3900
Hardware Description
For the position of the alarm input port on the EMUA and cable connections between the EMUA
and sensors, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
338
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
DBS3900 Cables
l For the cables in DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual, and IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual.
l For the RRU cables, see the installation guide for the corresponding type of RRU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
339
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dualmode scenario.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
340
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2 and P5
P3
P4
P6
P7
P8
P9
Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which
converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU,
RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A).
Figure 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
341
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2 and P5
P3
P4
P6
P7
P8
P9
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
342
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
Cable Description
P1
P2 and P5
P3
P4
P6
P7
P8
343
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide
power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-5 shows the power cable
connections.
Figure 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
344
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C).
The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides
power to customer equipment.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
345
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P2 and P11
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
346
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-7 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3 and P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
347
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P11
Figure 7-8 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T.
Figure 7-8 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P9
P2 and P10
P3
P4
P5
P6
348
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P7
P8
Figure 7-9 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T.
Figure 7-9 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
349
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Figure 7-10 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.
Figure 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
350
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-10 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P2 and P12
P3
P5 and P13
P7
P8
P9
P11
P4 and P14
Figure 7-11 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.
Figure 7-11 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
351
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2 and P4
P3
P5
P6
P7
P9 and P13
P10
P11
P8 and P12
Figure 7-12 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
352
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-12 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
P1 and P9
P2 and P11
P3
P5 and P12
P7
P8
P10
P4 and P13
Figure 7-13 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
353
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-13 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2 and P3
P4
P5
P6
P8 and P11
P9
P10
P7 and P12
354
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
If the DBS3900 serves as a triple-mode base station, it needs to be configured with two BBUs:
BBU0 and BBU1. The power cable connections in the cabinet housing BBU0 are the same as
those in the cabinet housing BBU1. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the power cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.
Figure 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P2 and P11
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
355
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P8
P9
Figure 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds
P2
P2
P12
P11
P1
P1
P9
P9
P10
P7
P9
BBU0
P3
P7
P10
BBU1
P6
P3
P6
P4
P4
P5
P5
P13
P14
P13
P14
P8
P8
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P3
P5 and P13
P7
P8
P9
P11
P4 and P14
356
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.C) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-17 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
357
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
358
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P4
When the BBU of a DBS3900 is configured in the APM30H (Ver.D) and the APM30H (Ver.D) is
configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU to provide power
for the RRUs. This section describes single- or dual-mode base stations configured with twelve RRUs as
examples.
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-19 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
Figure 7-19 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
359
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-19 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P9
P10
P12
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D). Figure 7-20 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
Figure 7-20 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
360
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-20 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P9
P12
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-21 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
Figure 7-21 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
361
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-21 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+2 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
P6
P7
P9
P10
P12
The following figure shows the power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with of 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T.
NOTE
This section uses describes the power cable connections in the IBBS700D. The power cable connections
in the IBBS700T are the same as those in the IBBS700D.
Figure 7-22 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
362
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Description
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P9
P12
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the
BBU, RRUs, TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200Ts (Ver.D). Figure 7-23 shows the power cable
connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-23 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
363
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
P6
P7
P9
P12
Figure 7-24 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D),
BBU +1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-24.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
364
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P9
P10
P12
365
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-25 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-25.
Figure 7-25 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with +1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
366
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P9
P12
Figure 7-26 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D),
BBU +2 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in
Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
367
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-26 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
P6
P7
P9
P10
P12
Figure 7-27 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-27.
Figure 7-27 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts
(Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
368
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
P6
P7
P9
P12
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
369
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
Figure 7-29 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below
BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as those in a base station configured with one
TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or two
TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
370
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
371
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P8
Figure 7-31 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.
Figure 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
372
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Figure 7-33 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
373
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
374
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A, two BBU power cables are required.
Figure 7-34 Power cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cable Description
P1
P2 to P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10 to P21
375
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Configuration Principles
l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected
to the SLPU.
Application Scenario
Table 7-35 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different modes.
Table 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the E1
Cable
GSM
only
"1" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
LTE
only
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
"2" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"3" in Figure
7-35 shows the
cable
connections.
376
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the FE
Cable
GSM
only
"4" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"5" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"6" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
377
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Cable
Configuration principles
l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
Application Scenario
Table 7-36 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different transmission modes.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
378
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the E1
Cable
GSM
Only
"1" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Trans
missio
n over
the FE
Cable
"2" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
LTE
Only
"3" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
Only
"4" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"5" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
379
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
LTE
Only
"6" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Configuration Principles
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected
to the SLPU.
Application Scenario
Table 7-37 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
TDM
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S
"1" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
IP
Over
E1/T1
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S
"2" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"3" in Figure
7-37 shows the
cable
connections.
UMTS
+LTE
"4" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections.
381
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
IP over GSM
FE/GE +UMT
Comm S
on
Trans
missio
n
Application Scenario
Legend
"5" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
+LTE
"6" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
382
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS
+LTE
"7" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
+UMT
S
GSM
+LTE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
"8" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"9" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
383
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS
+LTE
"10" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
UMTS
+LTE
"11" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
384
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
Configuration Principles
l
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
Application Scenario
Table 7-38 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
TDM
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S
"1" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
IP
Over
E1/T1
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S
"2" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"3" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections.
UMTS
+LTE
"4" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections.
386
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
IP over GSM
FE/GE +UMT
Comm S
on
Trans
missio
n
Application Scenario
Legend
"5" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
+LTE
"6" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
387
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS
+LTE
"7" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
+UMT
S
GSM
+LTE
"8" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"9" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
388
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS
+LTE
"10" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
UMTS
+LTE
"11" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
389
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
390
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Configuration Principles
l
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected
to the SLPU.
Application Scenario
Table 7-39 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
GSM
E1/T1
+UMT
S E1/
T1
GSM
+UMT
S
"1" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
FE/GE
+UMT
S FE/
GE
GSM
+UMT
S
"2" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
GSM
+LTE
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
GSM
+LTE
"3" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"4" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
391
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
UMTS
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
UMTS
+LTE
"5" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
UMTS
+LTE
"6" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
392
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode
Application Scenario
Table 7-40 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
393
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Application Scenario
Legend
GSM
E1/T1
+UMT
S E1/
T1
GU
"1" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
FE/GE
+UMT
S FE/
GE
GU
"2" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
GL
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
GL
UMTS
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
UL
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
UL
"3" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"4" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"5" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"6" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
394
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-41 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
395
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Mode Specification
Reference
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
Figure 7-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
396
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Application Scenario
Table 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Table 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Triple-Mode Scenario
Mode Specification
Reference
l Dual-mode includes
common and noncommon transmission.
For details, see the
397
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Triple-Mode Scenario
Mode Specification
Reference
Transmission Cable
Connections for a DualMode Base Station in
Common Transmission
Mode and the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a DualMode Base Station in
Non-Common
Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a singlemode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a SingleMode Base Station.
Figure 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
398
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
l Of all RRUs working in GSM mode, the RRU3008 or RRU3004 is used as an example to describe the
CPRI cable connections.
l Of all RRUs working in UMTS mode, the RRU3804 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in LTE mode, the RRU3201 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in multiple modes, the RRU3908 is used as an example to describe the CPRI
cable connections.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
399
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-44 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/
RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, nine RRUs support three sectors, and a group of three
RRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
Figure 7-44 CPRI cable connections (2)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
400
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-47 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.
Figure 7-47 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-48 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPd, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
401
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
CPRI cables are connected to CPRI ports on the LBBP sequentially from the CPRI0 port.
Figure 7-49 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPc, each RRU works in a single band and
supports 2T2R MIMO, and the base station uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth and supports
three sectors. BBU is short for baseband unit, RRU is short for remote radio unit, and MIMO is
short for multiple-input multiple-output.
Figure 7-49 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-50 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the LBBPd2 or LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R
MIMO, each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 10 MHz bandwidth and
supports three sectors.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
402
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-51 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R MIMO, each
pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 20 MHz bandwidth and supports three
sectors.
Figure 7-51 CPRI cable connections (3)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
403
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-53 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work
in single-band mode, the RRU3804s working in star topology and each supports a sector; the
RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and
chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the
same sector with different bands are cascaded.
Figure 7-53 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-54 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work
in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working
in the same sector with different bands are cascaded; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dualband mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a
sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands
are cascaded.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
404
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-55 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s work
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors;
the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working
in star topology correspond to three sectors.
Figure 7-55 CPRI cable connections (4)
405
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sector
with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.
Figure 7-56 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-57 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work
in dual-band mode, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, all the
RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode,
two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain
topology.
Figure 7-57 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 7-58 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3201s work
in single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support
4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology;
the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, and two RRU3008s serving the same sector with
different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.
Figure 7-58 CPRI cable connections (3)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
406
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-59 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3908s work
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRU3908s serving the same
sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in single-band mode, three
RRU3008s serve three sectors and use the star topology.
Figure 7-59 CPRI cable connections (4)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
407
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
As shown in Figure 7-61, the RRU3201s work in dual frequency bands, serve three sectors with
a bandwidth of 20 MHz or 15 MHz, support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to
the BBU by CPRI cables in star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band and
are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star-chain topology, and two RRU3804s serving
the same sector are cascaded.
Figure 7-61 CPRI cable connections (2)
As shown in Figure 7-62, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors
with a bandwidth of 10 MHz, support the 4T4R MIMO technology; two RRU3201s serving the
same sector are connected to the BBU in dual-star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single
frequency band and serve three sectors, and are connected to the BBU in star-chain topology,
with two RRU3804s serving the same sector cascaded.
Figure 7-62 CPRI cable connections (3)
Figure 7-63 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs use the
CPRI MUX topology, the UMTS mode is configured with the WBBPf, the LTE mode is
configured with the LBBPd, the RRU3929s (1700 MHz) are used as multi-mode RRUs, and all
CPRI cables are connected to the WBBPf; the LBBPd is not connected to any RRUs.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
408
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
The difference between the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is as follows: The GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario
applies to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
The difference between the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and GU+L (UCIU
+UMPT) scenario is as follows: In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, a BBU
in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station but not interconnected.
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in
the same base station are interconnected through the UCIU.
409
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
In the GL+U scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by the UCIU and
UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-64 shows the CPRI cable
connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-64 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dualmode scenario.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
410
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-65 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 configured with
1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario.
Figure 7-65 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 TMC+1 BBC
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3
S4 and S5
S6
S7
411
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-66 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC.
Figure 7-66 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3, S7
S4
S5 and S6
Figure 7-67 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
412
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3, S7
S4
S5 and S6
Figure 7-68 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 2
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
413
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-68 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs
Cable Description
S1
S2
S4
S5 and S6
Figure 7-69 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 2
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
414
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
S1
S2
S4
S5 and S6
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
415
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Figure 7-71 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).
Figure 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
416
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
417
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S3 and S5
Figure 7-73 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Figure 7-73 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
418
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-74 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of one APM30H (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Figure 7-74 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
S6
Figure 7-75 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
419
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-75 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
S6
Figure 7-76 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+four IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
420
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-76 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
S1
S2 S3
S1
S1
S2
S6
S1
S5
S6 S4
S6 S4
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
S6
Figure 7-77 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
421
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-77 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
S6
A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is configured
in the basic cabinet, and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. The monitoring devices
in all cabinets are connected to BBU0. Figure 7-78 shows the monitoring signal cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
422
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-78 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
S6
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
423
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Figure 7-80 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBUs of the DBS3900
are configured in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).
Figure 7-80 Monitoring signal cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a
single- or dual-mode base station
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
424
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
Figure 7-82 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
425
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-82 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
Figure 7-83 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
426
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-83 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
S5
Figure 7-84 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
427
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-84 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
S5
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
428
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-85 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
No.
Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
429
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-86 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T
No.
Description
S1
S4
S2 and S3
In a triple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base
station is not configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space below
BBU 0 in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base station is configured with a TMC11H
(Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D). Figure 7-87 shows the monitoring signal
cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
430
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-87 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
Figure 7-88 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base
station is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as
shown by 2 in Figure 7-88.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
431
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-88 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
Figure 7-89 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base
station is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as
shown by 2 in Figure 7-88.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
432
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-89 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
433
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-90 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base
station is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as
shown by 2 in Figure 7-88.
Figure 7-90 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
434
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-66 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3
Cable Description
S1
Figure 7-92 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D) and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space
below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base station is the same as those in the same
base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 2 in Figure 7-82.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
435
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-92 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, or
IFS06
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base stations in 110 V
AC/220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenario.
NOTE
l For details about the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBU is installed in the IMB03 or
IMB03+IFS06, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
l When the DBS3900 uses the OMB or IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single- or dualmode base station. When the DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06, the DBS3900 can be configured as a
single-, dual-, or triple-mode base station.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
436
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
S2
S1
S4
S1
S2
S3
S3
S5
S5
S4
S2
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
Figure 7-94 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with an AC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
437
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-94 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
438
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3
Figure 7-96 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with a DC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
439
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-96 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
440
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, only one CCU-BBU signal cable is required.
Figure 7-97 Monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1
TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cable Description
S1 and S2
S3
S4
441
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,
and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to
achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected
to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to
M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown
in Figure 7-98.
NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-74
lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.
BBU0
BBU1
Triple-Mode Scenario
GU
GL
GU
UL
Single-Mode Scenario
Figure 7-98 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT
WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband
data. As shown in Figure 7-98, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
442
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
One End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
Ground
terminal on
the BBU
OT terminal
(M8, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
External
ground bar
3V3 connector
PWR port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
LOAD6 wiring
terminal on the
DCDU
3V3 connector
PWR port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
EPS/LOAD1
443
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
DB26 male
connector
E1/T1 port on
the UELP in
the SLPU, or
E1/T1 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
Made onsite
according to
requirements
External
transmission
equipment
DB26 male
connector
E1/T1 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
FE/GE Ethernet
Cable
RJ45 connector
RJ45
connector
External
transmission
equipment
RJ45
connector
RJ45
connector
FE0 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU or
WMPT in the
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU
FE/GE port on
the LMPT in
the BBU
7.2.7 FE Surge
Protection Transfer
Cable
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU or
WMPT in the
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU
7.2.8
Interconnection
Cable Between the
FE Electrical Ports
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on
the WMPT in
the BBU
444
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
One End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
7.2.9
Interconnection
Cable Between FE
Optical Ports
LC connector
FE1 port on
the WMPT in
the BBU
LC connector
LC connector
FE1 port on
the WMPT or
GTMU in the
BBU
FC, SC, or LC
connector
External
transmission
equipment
DLC connector
CPRI port on
the GTMU or
WBBP in the
BBU
DLC
connector
CPRI_W port
on the RRU
7.2.12 APMI-BBU
Monitoring Signal
Cable
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
Twisted pair
TX+, TX-, RX
+, or RX- port
on the APMI
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU
Monitoring Signal
Cable
RJ45 connector
MON port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
COM_IN port
on the HEUA
7.2.15 Monitoring
Signal Cable
Between the CMUA
and the BBU
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
CMUA/
COM_IN
7.2.17 Monitoring
Signal Cable for the
EMUA
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port on
the EMUA
7.2.18 Monitoring
Signal Cable for the
PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM0
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
Cord end
terminal
ALM wiring
terminal on the
PSU (DC/DC)
7.2.19 In-Position
Signal Cable for the
PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM1
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
PRESENT port
on the PSU
(DC/DC)
445
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
External alarm
device
SMA male
connector
GPS port on
the LMPT or
USCU in the
BBU
N-type female
connector
GPS surge
protector
7.2.22 BBU
interconnection
signal cable
DLC connector
M0 to M4
ports on the
UCIU in the
BBU
DLC
connector
CI port on the
UMPT in the
BBU
7.2.23 Cable
Between two
Combined Base
Stations
DB15 male
connector
GCK port on
the UCIU in
the BBU
MD36 or
DB15 male
connector
DGLUb on the
DCTB in the
BTS3012
7.2.24 Adapter
Used for Local
Maintenance
USB connector
USB port on
the UMPT in
the BBU
Ethernet
connector
Ethernet cable
Exterior
A PGND cable is green and yellow and has a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.). Both
ends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-core
cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) is recommended.
Figure 7-100 shows a PGND cable.
Figure 7-100 PGND cable for the BBU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
446
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Type
Table 7-76 lists the mapping relationships between the power device for the BBU and the type
of the BBU power cable.
Table 7-76 Type of the BBU power cable
Cable
Power
Devices
Connector on
the Power
Device Side
Connector on
the BBU Side
Exterior
BBU power
cable
PDU and
DCDU-03B
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
3V3 connector
The exterior is
shown by 1 in
Figure 7-101.
EPS
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
The exterior is
shown by 2 in
Figure 7-101.
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
The exterior is
shown by 4 and
6 in Figure
7-101.
AC/DC power
system
supplying
power to a BBU
installed in the
OMB
H4 connector
AC/DC power
system
supplying
power to a BBU
installed in the
IMB03
H4 connector
The exterior is
shown by 3 n
Figure 7-101.
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
ETP48100-A1
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
447
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-101 shows a BBU power cable.
Figure 7-101 BBU power cable
(5) H4 connector
Cable Description
A power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-77 describes the pin assignment for the wires of
a power cable.
Table 7-77 BBU power cable description
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Wire Color in
Most Regions
Wire Color in
Other Regions
(UK)
A1
-48 V
Blue
Gray
A2
A3
GND
Black
Black
448
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and
100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.
One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable
is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-102 shows an E1/T1 cable.
Figure 7-102 E1/T1 signal cable
One End
L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-79, Table 7-80, and Table 7-81 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1
cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
449
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Pin on the DB26
Male Connector
Type(1)
Wire Label
X1.1
Tip
RX1+
X1.2
Ring
X1.3
Tip
X1.4
Ring
X1.5
Tip
X1.6
Ring
X1.7
Tip
X1.8
Ring
X1.19
Tip
X1.20
Ring
X1.21
Tip
X1.22
Ring
X1.23
Tip
X1.24
Ring
X1.25
Tip
X1.26
Ring
RX13
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
TX1+
TX1-
TX2+
TX2-
TX3+
TX3-
TX4+
TX4-
NOTE
(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Blue
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
White
X.3
Orange
X.4
White
X.5
Green
X.6
White
RX1Twisted pair
RX2+
RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+
RX3-
450
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.7
Brown
Twisted pair
RX4+
X.8
White
X.19
Gray
X.20
White
X.21
Blue
X.22
Red
X.23
Orange
X.24
Red
X.25
Green
X.26
Red
RX4Twisted pair
TX1+
TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+
TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+
TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+
TX4-
Table 7-81 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
X.3
X.4
X.5
X.6
X.7
X.8
X.19
X.20
X.21
X.22
X.23
X.24
X.25
RX1Twisted pair
RX2+
RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+
RX3-
Twisted pair
RX4+
RX4-
Twisted pair
TX1+
TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+
TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+
TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+
451
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Wire Color
X.26
Wire Type
Wire Label
TX4-
Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25
male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-103.
Figure 7-103 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-82 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer
cable.
Table 7-82 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the DB25 Male
Connector
Type
X1.20
X2.2
X1.19
X1.4
X2.3
Twisted pair cable
X1.3
X1.22
X2.5
Twisted pair cable
X1.21
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
X2.4
X2.6
X2.7
452
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Type
X1.6
X2.8
X1.5
X2.9
X1.24
X1.23
X2.10
X2.11
X1.8
X1.7
X2.12
X2.13
X1.1
X1.2
X2.14
X2.15
X1.25
X1.26
X2.24
X2.25
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable and has an RJ45 connector at each end, as
shown in Figure 7-104.
Figure 7-104 FE/GE cable
Cable Description
Table 7-83 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
453
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-83 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Pin on the RJ45
Connector at One
End
Color
Type
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2
X1.1
White and
orange
X1.6
Green
X1.3
White and
green
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.1
Twisted pair
X2.6
X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4
X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8
X2.7
Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-105.
Figure 7-105 FE surge protection transfer cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-84 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
454
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-84 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the RJ45
Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2
X1.1
White
X1.6
Green
X1.3
White
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
X2.1
Twisted pair
X2.6
X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4
X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8
X2.7
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-106.
Figure 7-106 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as
shown in Figure 7-107.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
455
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
(1) LC connector
Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-108, Figure 7-109, Figure 7-110.
Figure 7-108 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-109 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
456
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
CAUTION
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,
adhere to the following rules:
l
The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission
equipment.
The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission
equipment.
l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply with
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtail
and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode optical
module and a single-mode optical module, respectively.
Exterior
Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,
as shown in Figure 7-111.
Figure 7-111 Multimode fiber optic cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
457
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU side
is 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m
(0.098 ft).
Figure 7-112 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an
RRU.
Figure 7-112 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,
or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-113.
Figure 7-113 Single-mode pigtail
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
458
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side and
ODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side and
ODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF
Selection Principles
The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Table 7-85 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Remote
Distance
Selection Principle
Remarks
Less than or
equal to 100 m
(328.08 ft)
Greater than
100 m (328.08
ft) and equal to
or less than
150 m (492.12
ft)
Recommended: single-mode
fiber optic cable (single-mode
pigtail and trunk single-mode
fiber optic cable)
459
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Remote
Distance
Selection Principle
Remarks
Greater than
150 m (492.12
ft)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-86 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a
CPRI fiber optic cable.
Table 7-86 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiber
optic cable
Label
Installation Position
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between a BBU
and an RRU
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between Two
RRUs
Single-Mode Pigtail
1A
CPRI RX port on
RRU 1
1B
CPRI TX port on
RRU 1
2A
CPRI TX port on
RRU 0
ODF
2B
CPRI RX port on
RRU 0
ODF
Exterior
The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and four bare wires
at the other end. Figure 7-115 shows an APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
460
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-87 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-87 Pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector
Color
Description
Corresponding
Port on the
APMI
X1.1
White
X2
Twisted pair
TX+
X1.2
Orange
X3
X1.4
Blue
X4
X1.5
White
X5
TXTwisted pair
RX+
RX-
Exterior
Figure 7-116 shows an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-116 HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
461
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Description
Table 7-88 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-88 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End
X2 End
Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Exterior
Figure 7-117 shows an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-117 HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-89 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
462
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-89 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU
and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-118 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.
Figure 7-118 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
Pin Assignment
Table 7-90 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the CMUA and the BBU.
Table 7-90 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and
the BBU
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
463
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Wire Type
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Exterior
Figure 7-119 shows a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-119 Exterior of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-91 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-91 Pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
464
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Type
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Exterior
Figure 7-120 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA.
Figure 7-120 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
Pin Assignment
Table 7-92 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
EMUA.
Table 7-92 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector
DB9 male
connector
Color
Description
Associated
Port on the
APMI
X1.1
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
TX+
465
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector
DB9 male
connector
Color
X1.2
X2.7
Orange
X1.5
X2.6
White
X1.4
X2.2
Blue
Description
Associated
Port on the
APMI
TX-
Twisted pair
RXRX+
Exterior
Figure 7-121 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-121 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-93 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Table 7-93 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
X1 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.2
Blue
Twisted pair
X1.1
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.3
White
X1.4
Green
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
466
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-122 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-122 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-94 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Table 7-94 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
467
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-123. One RJ45
connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.
Figure 7-123 BBU alarm cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-95 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.
Table 7-95 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBU
Alarm
Port
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Wire
Color
Wire
Type
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Description
EXTALM1
X1.1
White and
orange
Twisted
pair
X2.1
Boolean input 4+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
X1.3
White and
green
X2.3
Boolean input 5+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
X1.5
White and
blue
X2.5
Boolean input 6+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.7
Boolean input 7+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
X1.1
White and
orange
X2.1
Boolean input 0+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
Boolean input 0+
(GND)
EXTALM0
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
468
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
BBU
Alarm
Port
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Wire
Color
Wire
Type
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Description
X1.3
White and
green
Twisted
pair
X2.3
Boolean input 1+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
X1.5
White and
blue
X2.5
Boolean input 2+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.7
Boolean input 3+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-124.
Figure 7-124 GPS clock signal cable
469
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable Type
BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,
as listed in Table 7-96.
Table 7-96 Cable type
Cable
Function
Installation Position
Forwards baseband
information from one BBU to
another
Exterior
l
The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and
synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in
the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure
7-125. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable
is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-126.
Figure 7-125 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband
information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-127. When two BBUs are
installed in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When
two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters
long.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure
7-128 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-128 Cable between two combined base stations (1)
Figure 7-129 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-129 Cable between two combined base stations (2)
Pin Assignment
As shown in Figure 7-128, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male
connector at the other end. Table 7-97 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
471
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-97 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)
Pin on the DB15
Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.6
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.7
Blue
X1.3
X2.11
White
X1.4
X2.12
Orange
X1.5
X2.2
White
X1.10
X2.3
Green
X1.6
X2.15
White
X1.11
X2.16
Brown
X1.12
X2.10
White
X1.15
X2.28
Gray
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
As shown in Figure 7-129, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-98 lists
the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-98 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Blue
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.4
X2.4
Orange
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.10
X2.10
Green
X1.6
X2.6
White
X1.11
X2.11
Brown
X1.12
X2.12
White
X1.15
X2.15
Gray
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
472
DBS3900
Hardware Description
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-130.
Figure 7-130 Adapter used for local maintenance
Pin Assignment
Table 7-99 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.
Table 7-99 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance
Issue 10 (2013-05-27)
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.9
Blue
Twisted pair
X2.1
X1.8
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.5
White
X1.Shell
X2.2
Twisted pair
X2.3
X2.6
Shield
X2.Shell
473